JP6627919B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

For example, in the pachinko game machine such gaming machine, triggered by the game ball has entered the special startup ball entrance portion provided in the game area, lottery whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state, such as those or gaming state Is performed. In addition, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and at the time of the final stop display of the variable display, the stop result according to the lottery result is displayed. A display effect for one game time to be displayed is executed. Further, when the lottery result is a transition winning to those or game state Ru so-called, in the example, after the display effect of 1 game batch is executed, for example, the opening and closing of the variable ball entrance device provided in the game region The payout of the game balls according to the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry device is executed.

  In addition, when the game ball enters the starting ball entry section while the display of the pattern is being changed, the information used for the winning lottery is held and stored up to a predetermined number (for example, four). There is a pachinko game machine that is becoming. In the case where the image is held and stored, after the variation display of the pattern is completed, a winning lottery is performed using the information stored and held, and the next variation display of the pattern is started (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2004-81853

Here, in the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of satisfactorily increasing the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention
A picture display means for variably displaying the picture on the display screen,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a specified number predetermined as a plurality of numbers as an upper limit,
When a determination is made as to whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined addition information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the obtained information storage means A determination unit for sequentially performing the determination on the plurality of special information,
A bonus granting unit that grants a bonus to the player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determining unit being a granting response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information,
Prior to the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means or based on the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means, a variation display of the design is started in the design display means, Displaying a stop result corresponding to the determination result and terminating the variation display of the pattern as one of the game times, and changing the pattern of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means. Game times control means for controlling the picture display means so that display is performed,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means determines, in each game time, mode information corresponding to the display mode of the pattern on the display screen when the display of the pattern is changed based on the result of the determination of the assignment. In the case where the variation display of the pattern of each game is performed, the variation display of the pattern of each game is performed in a display mode according to the mode information determined by the mode information determination unit.
The information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the assignment determination, and the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the assignment determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at the timing;
State setting means for setting a special notification state based on that the specified result by the preceding specifying means was a predetermined specified result,
In the situation where the special notification state is set, and when the setting is performed, in a situation where a game time prior to the game time related to the special information which has been specified by the destination specifying means is performed. In a situation where the special display corresponding to the specification result of the destination specifying means for the special information that has been specified is executed by the pattern display means, and the variable display of the pattern is performed. When the setting of the special notification state is performed in a predetermined period during the change display of the pattern, a special notification control unit configured to cause the stop result of the game round to be a special mode corresponding to the special notification,
When the special notification state is set in a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed, the special information state is determined by the mode information determining means in the game round. If the variable display time corresponding to the mode information is a variable display time that needs to be changed in order to set the stop result to the special mode, a special notification that prevents the stop result of the game round from being the special mode. Limiting means;
With
The picture display means has a first variable display area, a second variable display area, and a third variable display area as a plurality of variable display areas,
The game-time control means aligns an assigned symbol corresponding to the assigned correspondence result among a plurality of symbols on one predetermined active line formed by the plurality of variable display areas on the display screen. It is configured to notify that the special information that has triggered the game round is the special information corresponding to the granting result by performing stop display.
The special notification control means, when the setting of the special notification state is performed in response to the special information that is the giving correspondence result, the added picture corresponding to the giving correspondence result, in the plurality of variable display areas It is a configuration to execute the special notification as the special mode to stop display in all the variable display area, and to prevent the stop display in line with the applied pattern on the activated line,
In each of the game times, based on a result of the giving determination, a variable display time determining unit that determines a variable display time when the variable display of the pattern is performed, the mode information determining unit includes the variable display time determining unit. Is to determine the aspect information corresponding to the determined variable display time,
In the aspect information determined by the aspect information determining means, a stop display is provided in the first variable display area and the second variable display area of the plurality of variable display areas as a stage before the variable display is finally stopped. Reach variation display in which a reach line is formed with the same pattern to be displayed and a pattern is variably displayed in the third variation display area of the plurality of variation display areas in a state where the reach line is formed. Aspects are included,
At least in the game time in which the specific reach fluctuation display mode is performed, the pattern stopped and displayed in the third fluctuation display area is uniquely determined according to the fluctuation display time determined by the fluctuation display time determination means. Has been
The special notification control means is configured to set the first fluctuation display area and the second fluctuation in a game time in which the specific reach fluctuation display mode is performed in a situation where the special notification state is set by the state setting means. Performing a reach pattern setting process to set the reach pattern forming the reach line by stopping and displaying in the display area as the granting pattern corresponding to the special information which has triggered the special notification, and the third variable display By leaving the pattern stopped and displayed in the area as the pattern corresponding to the variable display time, in the game mode in which the specific reach variation display mode is performed in the situation where the special notification state is set, There is a case where the special notification is executed and a case where the special notification is not executed,
The special notification restricting unit is configured to set the special notification state in a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern in a state where the variable display of the pattern is performed in a mode in which the reach variable display mode is not executed. If performed, if the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means in the game round is the variable display time that needs to be changed to make the stop result the special mode, The special notification state is set in a state in which the fluctuation display of the pattern is performed in a mode in which the reach fluctuation display mode is executed while the stop result of the game round is not set to the special mode. When the special notification state is set, the reach pattern setting process is not executed and the stop display is performed in the third variable display area regardless of the period when the special notification state is set. By changing the pattern corresponding to the variable display time to a pattern corresponding to the variable display time, when the variable display time is required to be changed in the game, the stop result of the game is not set to the special mode. It is characterized by being.

  It is possible to satisfactorily increase the degree of attention to the game.

FIG. 1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing a main configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing a main configuration of the pachinko machine. The front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A) Front view of the operating port device showing the case where the electric accessory is in the closed state, and (b) front view of the operating port device showing the case where the electric accessory is in the open state. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the symbol displayed on a symbol display device. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning / non-prize drawing. (A) Explanatory diagram for explaining a success / failure table, (b) Explanatory diagram for explaining a distribution table. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the MPU of the main control device. The flowchart which shows the winning processing for the working ports in the MPU of the main control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a confirmation process for a reservation notice; 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process of a hold command. The flowchart which shows the winning processing for through. 5 is a flowchart illustrating normal processing. The flowchart which shows a game time control process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating data setting processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a change start process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process of a variable display time. Flowchart showing a game state transition process. 9 is a flowchart showing a process for supporting electric power. 9 is a flowchart showing an electric opening / closing process. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration related to a suspension notice. 9 is a flowchart showing a pending command handling process. The flowchart which shows a jackpot correspondence setting process. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a miss reach setting process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display control process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a change start process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a stop result setting process that does not correspond to the suspension notice. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a middle symbol row stop result table. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a stop result setting process for off-normal reach that does not correspond to the suspension notice. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big hit stop line change table. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variable display pattern table. Explanatory drawing for explaining a reach display. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a process for ending a change. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a stop result setting process corresponding to a suspension notice; 9 is a flowchart illustrating a stop result setting process for off-normal reach corresponding to the suspension notice. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of a suspension notice in a normal reach display. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of a suspension notice in a normal reach display. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a suspension notice stop line change table. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of a suspension notice in a normal reach display. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a flag erasing process. 9 is a flowchart showing a process during change. (A) Explanatory diagram for explaining a first stage correction table, (b) Explanatory diagram for explaining a second stage correction table, (c) Explanatory diagram for explaining a third stage correction table . 9 is a time chart for explaining a state in which a change notice pattern is corrected and a suspension notice is executed. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific aspect of a reservation notice. 14 is a flowchart showing a stop result setting process for off-normal reach corresponding to the suspension notice in the second embodiment. (A) Explanatory diagram for explaining the reach symbol determination table for non-specific symbol reservation advance notice, and (b) Explanatory diagram for explaining the reach symbol determination table for specific symbol hold advance notice. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of a suspension notice in a normal reach display. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of a suspension notice in a normal reach display. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific aspect of a reservation notice. 17 is a flowchart showing a stop result setting process for off-normal reach corresponding to the suspension notice in the third embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a stop result setting process for off-normal reach that does not correspond to the suspension notice. 17 is a flowchart illustrating processing during change according to the fourth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a reach handling process. (A) Explanatory drawing for explaining the reach correspondence first stage correction table, and (b) Explanatory diagram for explaining the reach correspondence second stage correction table. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lower symbol row stop result correction table. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of a suspension notice in a normal reach display.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a “pachinko machine”) that is a kind of gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are exploded perspective views showing main components of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In FIG. 2, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in a forward direction. . The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting a wooden plate or the like to four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island facilities.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. More specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation end side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation tip side in a front view. It has been. As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is turned rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation end side in front view. It is possible to move.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the tip of its rotation, so that the gaming machine main body 12 is locked to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. And a function to lock the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on a cylinder lock 17 provided to be exposed at the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is almost the same as the outer frame 11. A substantially oval window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area formed on the front face of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper working opening (first starting entering ball portion or a non-priority starting entering ball portion) 33, and a lower operating opening (second starting entering ball portion or preferential starting entering ball). Unit) 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display unit 43, a display unit 44 for accessory, and the like.

  When a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper working opening 33, and the lower working opening 34, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 24, Payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is executed based on the detection result. In this case, the payout of 10 game balls is executed when the ball enters the general winning opening 31, and the payout of 15 game balls is executed when the ball enters the variable winning device 32. Is executed, and three game balls are paid out when a ball enters the upper operating port 33, and four game balls are paid out when a ball enters the lower operating port 34. Is executed.

  The number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, in order to increase the advantage of the lower working port 34 with respect to the upper working port 33, it is preferable to set the payout number of the lower working port 34 larger than the payout number of the upper working port 33. In order to enhance the advantage of the variable winning device 32 with respect to each of the operating ports 33 and 34, it is preferable to set the payout number of the variable winning device 32 larger than the payout number of each of the operating ports 33 and 34.

  In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports or the like are discharged from the game area through the out port 37. In addition, a large number of nails 38 are planted on the game board 24 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  Here, the entering ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Some embodiments are not included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish game balls from entering the out port 37, game balls enter the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, or the through gate 35. Is also expressed as winning.

  The upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are unitized as working port devices and installed on the game board 24. The upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are both open upward. The two working ports 33 and 34 are arranged vertically, more specifically in a vertical direction, with the upper working port 33 facing upward. The lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The details of the electric accessory 34a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A shows a case where the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state), and FIG. 5B is a state in which the electric accessory 34a is in an open state (support state or guide state). Shows the case.

  The operation port case 33a constituting the upper operation port 33 projects toward the front side and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and the upper side length is shorter than the lower side length. At this time, the upper side length of the operating port case 33a (that is, the left and right width of the upper operating port 33) is set to a length slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the lower side length is set when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. The length is larger than the distance between the left and right electric roles 34a. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the installation interval between the operation ports 33 and 34 is set so that the distance between the operating port case 33a and the upper end of the electric accessory 34a is slightly shorter than the diameter of the game ball. Has been adjusted.

  According to the above configuration, in the closed state of the electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot enter the lower operating port 34, and the lower operating port 34 can be awarded by opening the electric accessory 34a. In particular, at this time, during the operation in which the electric accessory 34a shifts from the closed state to the open state, the operating port case 33a of the upper operating port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, which becomes an obstacle. Until the accessory 34a is sufficiently opened, it is impossible to win a game ball in the lower operating port 34, and it is possible to win only when the electric accessory 34a is almost fully opened. In other words, the game ball that has fallen from above hits the side surface of the operating port case 33a and is flipped outward, and does not directly win the lower operating port 34. Thereby, when the electric accessory 34a is opened in a very short time, it is extremely difficult to win the lower operating port 34, and only when the open state of the electric accessory 34a is continued, the lower operating port 34 is opened. Winning becomes easy.

  In addition to the configuration in which the operation port case 33a of the upper operation port 33 is substantially trapezoidal as described above, the operation port case 33a of the upper operation port 33 may have a two-stage configuration in which the upper width is narrower and the lower width is wider. A substantially C-shaped guide piece may be provided on each of the left and right sides of the opening 33, or an obstruction nail may be implanted diagonally below the operating port case 33a.

  The variable winning device 32 has a large winning opening 32a communicating with the back side of the game board 24, and has an opening / closing door 32b for opening and closing the large winning opening 32a. The opening / closing door 32b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won or hard to win, and a predetermined number of game balls are likely to be won when a transition to an open / close execution mode (open / close execution state) is made in an internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode to which a shift is made when a jackpot win or a special off win is made. The open / close execution mode will be described later in detail. As an opening mode of the variable prize winning device 32, the lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prizes is one round, and the variable prize winning device 32 is repeatedly opened with a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is a mode that is performed.

  The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are provided on a decorative member 39 arranged along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 39 extends from the surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces a window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is smaller than one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

  The main display 43 and the accessory display 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and a game ball is provided in front of both the display units 43 and 44. Falling is prevented. In addition, on the upper surface of the decorative member 39, a part of the plurality of general winning openings 31 described above is installed in a state of being opened upward.

  The main display unit 43 is provided with a display area, in which a result of an internal lottery performed based on winning in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is clearly shown. In other words, the winning in the upper operating port 33 and the winning in the lower operating port 34 are not distinguished from each other, and the main display 43 is performed based on the winning in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. The result of the internal lottery is specified in a common display area.

  Although the detailed description by illustration is omitted, the accessory display unit 44 has a segment display, and the segment display is provided with an accessory result display unit. The accessory result display section is a display section for specifying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the through gate 35. In this case, in the character result display unit, a change display (or a variable display or a switching display) of the pattern is performed by sequentially turning on and off the display segments, triggered by the winning of the through gate 35. As a result of the stoppage of the variable display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the through gate 35 is clearly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the through gate 35 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the electric open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the result display section for the accessory and displayed in a fluctuating manner. Is stopped, and then the state shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric-power-opened state, the electric-powered object 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner. Note that the accessory display unit 44 is not limited to the above configuration, and other configurations exemplified in the main display unit 43 may be applied, and a configuration different from the main display unit 43 may be applied. You may.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 for performing variable display (or variable display or switching display) of symbols. The variable display unit 36 is provided with a center frame 42 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The center frame 42 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game balls are prevented from falling in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and the configuration is such that there is no inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is reduced due to the game balls falling. .

  The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side on the top, middle and bottom, and these symbols are scrolled in the left-right direction and displayed in a variably manner. In this case, the variable display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. Then, for example, in the symbol display device 41, the symbol display is set in advance in the game cycle in which the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened 15 times. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  In the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42, a first holding lamp section 45 corresponding to the symbol display device 41 is provided. The number of game balls winning in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is retained up to a maximum of four, and the retained number is displayed by turning on the first retaining lamp unit 45. As described above, the upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10, so that the visibility of the first holding lamp portion 45 is not hindered by the drop of the game ball.

  Below the center frame 42, a third holding lamp unit 47 corresponding to the accessory result display unit of the accessory display unit 44 is provided. The number of game balls passing through the through gate 35 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of the held balls is displayed by turning on the third holding lamp unit 47. Note that a configuration in which each of the holding lamp portions 45 to 47 is displayed on a part of the symbol display device 41 may be employed.

  An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24, and the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 constitute a guide rail, and a game fired from a game ball firing mechanism 53 is provided. The ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. The game ball launching mechanism 53 is mounted below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 as shown in FIG. 2, and is fired by operating a firing handle 54 provided on the front door frame 14. The operation is performed.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire game area can be visually recognized from the front. The window 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the above-described window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed of glass to be colorless and transparent, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent.

  Around the window 61, light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A display lamp 63 is provided above the window 61 as a part of the various lamps. Further, on both left and right sides of the display lamp section 63, there are provided speaker sections 64 for outputting a sound effect or the like according to a game state.

  Below the window 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 bulging toward the near side are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower plate 72 that also opens upward inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later, and guiding the game balls to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. The lower plate 72 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 71. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 71 and the lower plate 72 through the passage forming unit 73 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 81 and a sound lamp controller 82 are mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board that controls the main control of the game and a power outage monitoring board that monitors power. The main control board and the power outage monitoring board are provided in a board box 83 made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed and configured. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are inseparably connected to each other by a box connecting portion 85 as separation preventing means (or connecting means), whereby the board box 83 is sealed. And, by being inseparably connected by these box connecting portions 85, when opening the internal space of the substrate box 83, the substrate box 83 needs to be broken or partly cut off. A plurality of box connecting portions 85 are provided on the long sides of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used to perform the connecting process.

  Any configuration can be applied to the box connecting portion 85 as long as the box base and the box cover can be connected so that the box base cannot be opened. The box cover and the box cover are connected so that they cannot be opened. The combining process by the box combining unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the combining, and even if unauthorized opening is performed, such a situation can be detected early and easily. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole of the plurality of box coupling portions 85. When the board box 83 is opened, for example, when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box connecting portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box connecting portion 85 are connected. And the connecting part with the box body are cut off. Thereby, the box base and the box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. Thereafter, when the joining process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the long hole of another box joining portion 85. If a history indicating that the board box 83 has been opened is left in the board box 83, it can be easily found by looking at the board box 83 that an unauthorized opening has been performed.

  A plurality of connecting pieces 86 are provided on one short side of the substrate box 83 so as to protrude to the side. These connecting pieces 86 correspond one-to-one with a plurality of connected pieces 87 formed on the mount of the main control device 81, and the connecting piece 86 and the connected piece 87 make the board box 83 and the mount stand The joining process is performed between.

  In addition, as a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the substrate box 83, a seal may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing seal is peeled off from the affixed portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing seal remains on the substrate box 83 side, and a trace thereof remains. Further, an IC tag for transmitting a response wave including identification information in response to a call wave of a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal, and when the seal is removed, the antenna of the IC tag is disconnected and the response time is reduced. It is good also as a structure which cannot transmit a wave.

  The sound lamp control device 82 includes a sound lamp control board that controls sound and lamp display according to an instruction from the main control device 81 and a display control device (not shown), and the sound lamp control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. And housed in a substrate box 84.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism 92 and a control device assembling unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 projecting rearward and having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81 and the sound lamp control device 82 from the rear. are doing.

  The payout mechanism 92 is provided so as to bypass the protective cover 94, and a tank 95 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game arcade are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. And a payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. The dispensing mechanism 92 is provided with a back pack substrate to which a main power of, for example, 24 volts AC is supplied, and on which a power switch for turning on and off the power is provided.

  Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal plate 99 on the rotation axis side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal plate 99 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when a game ball runs short in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, a predetermined number of game balls. Terminal for outputting a signal each time the computer is lent, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and a state transition such as an open / close execution mode. An output terminal is provided for outputting a signal at that time (or during transition to the state). Then, through these output terminals, signals relating to the state of the frame side are output to the management control device of the game hall side. Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent is unnecessary in a so-called cash machine.

  The control device assembling unit 93 includes a payout control device 97, a power supply and a firing control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply and firing control device 98 are arranged one on the other so that the payout control device 97 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board that controls the payout device 96 is accommodated in a substrate box. In this case, the same fraud suppressing means as the board box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the board box of the payout control device 97.

  The power supply and the firing control device 98 are configured such that a power supply and a firing control board are housed in a board box, and the board generates and outputs predetermined power required by various control devices and the like, and is further provided by the player. The launch of the game ball is controlled in accordance with the operation of the firing handle 54. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a function of storing and holding various data, and can maintain a state at the time of a power failure even if a power failure occurs, and can return to a state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure. It has become.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 202 is mounted on a main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 is a ROM 203 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 203. This is an element in which the RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which some of the functions of the MPU 202, such as the function of the ROM 203 and the function of the RAM 204, are provided as separate elements.

  The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 202 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 205 provided in the main control device 81, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211a to 211e, and the like. In this case, the power supply and the emission control device 98 are connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. In addition, as a part of the various detection sensors 211a to 211e, a winning-corresponding ball unit (paying-corresponding ball unit) such as a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port 33, a lower operating port 34, a through gate 35, and the like. Are connected to each other, and the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 determines a winning in each of the ball entry sections (ball entry determination). In addition, the MPU 202 executes a jackpot generation lottery based on winning in the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, and executes a support generation lottery based on a winning in the through gate 35.

  To the output side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and an audio lamp control device 82 are connected. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 97 based on the result of the prize determination for the prize-corresponding ball entry unit. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to. Then, when the winning in the general winning opening 31 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output. When the winning in the variable winning device 32 is specified, fifteen balls are specified. When a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of a game ball is output and a winning in the upper operation port 33 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output and the lower operation port 34 is output. Is determined, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

  Various commands such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the audio lamp control device 82. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various types of information as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  On the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 32c for opening and closing the opening / closing door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric accessory driving unit 34b for opening and closing the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34, and a main display. The unit 43 is connected. The main control board 201 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is executed in the MPU 202 so that the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed. Further, when the open state of the electric accessory 34a is won, the MPU 202 controls the driving of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, display control of the main display unit 43 is executed by the MPU 202.

  Further, an external output terminal plate 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 202. In this case, the external output terminal board 99 has a jackpot signal output terminal (first state signal output terminal) 99a and a jackpot and special off signal output terminal (second state signal) as output terminals for outputting a signal at the time of state transition. Output terminal) 99b.

  When the gaming result is a jackpot result, the MPU 202 can output a jackpot signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side through the jackpot signal output terminal 99a. Specifically, in a normal state, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal 99a, and when a jackpot result is obtained, a HI level signal is output. The output mode of this signal may be reversed.

  The power failure monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply and the firing control device 98, and monitors a voltage of DC stable 24 volts which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and the firing control device 98. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of the prize balls and the loaned balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

  The power supply and the launch control device 98 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the operating power required for each of the main control board 201 and the payout control device 97 is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. I do. The power supply and launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launching mechanism 53, and the game ball launching mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  Based on various commands input from the main control device 81, the sound lamp control device 82 controls the holding lamp portions 45 to 47 provided on the variable display unit 36, the display lamp portion 63 provided on the front door frame 14, and the speaker. The drive control of the unit 64 and the control of the display control device 212 are performed.

  The display control device 212 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on a command input from the audio lamp control device 82. In this case, the voice lamp control device 82 determines the symbol change display time and the type of the symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41, based on various commands input from the main control device 81. , A lottery of the presence or absence of the reach and the contents of the reach effect is executed.

  Here, the content related to the symbol change display of each game round will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8.

  The display control device 212 is provided with a character ROM. As shown in FIGS. 7 (a) to 7 (i), the character ROM has nine types of main symbol data to which numbers "1" to "9" are attached, and as shown in FIG. 7 (j). And sub-symbol data without numbers are stored in advance.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with a periodicity. In this case, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1” are arranged. , A main symbol of “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of the main symbols. That is, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the display screen G is configured to stop and display three symbols for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be. The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and the entire symbol row Z1 is formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number assigned to any of the activated lines is formed. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is completed, the big hit movie is displayed as the occurrence of the normal big hit result or the positive change big hit result.

  In addition, in consideration of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the first symbol row). The two symbol rows and the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a third symbol row (or a third symbol row).

  Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and when the probability change jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbols are assigned. The combination is stopped and displayed. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”, and when a jackpot result usually occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. You.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set so as to be arranged side by side, and the direction of symbol change display in the symbol row may be set to the vertical direction.

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  The MPU 202 uses the various counter information during the game to perform a jackpot occurrence lottery, set the display on the main display unit 43, set the symbol display on the symbol display device 41, set the display on the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for a lottery of a jackpot occurrence, and a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type such as a probability change jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach lottery when the symbol display device 41 comes off and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the fluctuating display time on the symbol display device 41 are determined. The variation type counter CS is used. Further, an electric accessory opening counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is to be in the electric opening state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. The RAM 204 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 232 including a reserved area RE and an execution area AE. The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are chronologically stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 in accordance with the winning history of the game ball to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. It is designed to be stored.

  More specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be added one by one in the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball has won the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a hit / fail table (hit / hit information group) in a hit / hit table storage area 221 as a hit / hit information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, as the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode (low probability success / failure information group) in FIG. 10A and a success / failure table for the high probability mode in FIG. Probability information group for probability). That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low-probability mode (low-probability state) and a high-probability mode (high-probability state) are set as lottery modes in the winning / rejecting lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the low probability mode winning / refusing table is referred to at the time of the above-mentioned lottery, as shown in FIG. 10A, the value of the random number for winning the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high-probability mode is referred to at the time of the above-mentioned lottery, as shown in FIG. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode. If the winning probability is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 29, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 29). Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results include (1) the mode of opening / closing control of the variable prize device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the win / fail lottery means after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the operating port 34.

  Here, as an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of winning of the variable winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high and low. Thus, the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 32a is performed 15 times (the number of times for high frequency) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed for 30 seconds (high frequency time). ) Elapses or until the winning number in the special winning opening 32a reaches 10 (high-frequency number). On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 32a is performed twice (the number of times for low frequency) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed for 0.2 seconds (low frequency time). Is continued or until the winning number in the special winning opening 32a becomes 6 (low-frequency number).

  In this case, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the shooting handle 54 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 53 is set so that one game ball is fired toward the game area in 0.6 seconds. Drive controlled. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening 32a is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening 32a is shorter than the firing cycle of the game balls. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

  The number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the opening time limit for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are the low frequency winning mode in the high frequency winning mode. The value is not limited to the above value as long as the frequency of winning in the variable winning device 32 during the period from the start of the opening / closing execution mode to the end thereof is higher than the above. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of open / close times than the low-frequency winning mode, the open limit time for one open is longer, or the open limit number for one open is set larger. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no prize to the variable winning device 32 occurs. It is good to have composition. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the product of the launch cycle of the game balls and the opening limit number is set to be shorter than the opening limit time for one opening, while in the low frequency winning mode, for one opening, The product of the launch cycle of the game balls and the opening limit number may be set to be longer than the opening limit time. Further, even if the firing interval of the game balls and the opening time of one big winning opening 32a are not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, the latter is set to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which the winning in the variable winning device 32 does not substantially occur.

  As the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34, the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is compared with a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area. The low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) so that the frequency of the open state per unit time is relatively high and low. Is set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric-commerce-opening state in the electric auditors product opening lottery using the electric auditors product opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric-power-released state is elected is set to be larger than in the low-frequency support mode, and one more opening is performed. The time is set long. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric utility open state is elected and the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the electric accessory 34a is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, a minimum securing time is set shorter than in the low-frequency support mode, in which the minimum required time is secured after one electric-powered-object opening lottery is performed and then the next electric-powered-object opening lottery is performed. Have been.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a winning will occur in the lower operation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the upper working port 33 is higher than that of the lower working port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the winning to the lower working port 34 is higher than the upper working port 33. The probability of winning is increased. Then, when a prize is generated in the lower operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, and therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls so much. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency of the electric utility opening state per unit time in the high frequency support mode compared to the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration. It is good also as a structure which makes the probability of winning the electrification open state high in. Further, increasing the number of times of opening and lengthening the opening time, shortening the minimum securing time required for performing the next motor-powered object opening lottery after one electric-powered object opening lottery is performed. By applying one of the conditions or an arbitrary combination of the conditions (i.e., shortening the one-time fluctuation display time in the accessory display unit 44) and increasing the winning probability, the low frequency support mode can be performed. The advantage of the frequent support mode may be enhanced.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at a timing when the game ball has won the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34.

  The distribution destination of the game result to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 222 in the ROM 203 as distribution information group storage means. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the distribution table, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), a normal jackpot result (low-probability special game result) and a probable variable jackpot result (high-probability special game result) are set as distribution destinations of the game result. ing.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / absent lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the reference number of terminations (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the game state to the normal jackpot state (low-probability-compatible special game state).

  The probability change jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode is continued until the lottery result in the winning / non-winning lottery becomes a jackpot state win and the state shifts to the jackpot state. In other words, the probability change jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the game state to the probability change jackpot state (high probability corresponding special game state).

  Note that the normal gaming state in relation to each of the above gaming states refers to a state in which the winning / rejecting lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the probable variable jackpot result.

  The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 238 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball has won the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the holding area RE of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. Then, it is determined whether or not to generate the reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203. However, in the game cycle in which the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, but may be individually set according to the game state. For example, a configuration in which the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is set to be larger when the support mode is the high frequency support mode than when the low frequency support mode is set.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) includes a symbol display device 41 capable of performing a variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and the open / close execution mode of the variable prize device 32 is set to a high frequency prize mode. In the gaming machine where the stop display result after the variable display is a special display result, the stop display result is derived display after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started in the symbol display device 41. This is a display state for causing the player to think that the display state is a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result before the special display is performed.

  In other words, a combination of the big hit symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established by stopping and displaying the symbols in some of the symbol columns among the plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. This is a display state in which combinations of reach symbols that are likely to be displayed are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol columns.

  More specifically, a combination of big hit symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency prize mode is established on a preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41 as a stage before terminating the variable display of the symbols. That is, a reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that are likely to be displayed, and a variation display of the symbol is performed by a final stop symbol row in a state where the reach line is formed.

  When the display contents of FIG. 8 are specifically described, first, the variable display of symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is terminated, and in the state where the variable display of symbols is further terminated in the lower symbol row Z3, any valid When the main symbols with the same numbers attached to the lines L1 to L5 are stopped and displayed, a reach line is formed, and in the state where the reach line is formed, the symbol variation display is performed in the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line so that the main symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. The variable display of the symbol is ended.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen thereof. Examples include those that perform an effect and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or hiding the combination of the reach symbols. Further, when the reach display is performed or before the reach display, the determination as to whether or not to perform the advance notice display using the predetermined image such as the predetermined character is performed using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

  The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 202 to determine the variation display time on the main display unit 43 and the symbol variation display time on the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is obtained when the symbol display device 41 determines the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation of the symbol.

  For example, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one within a range of 0 to 249, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 249). The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the electric utility holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in an open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is not controlled to be in an open state.

  As described above, the MPU 202 determines the variable display time in the symbol display device 41 using at least the buffer value of the variable type counter CS, and uses the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 for the determination. Can be Further, in the MPU 202, the stop result in the main display unit 43 is determined by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. The result table storage area 224 is used.

  Next, the reserved ball storage area 232 will be described. The reserved ball storage area 232 includes the reserved area RE and the execution area AE as described above. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and matches the winning history to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4. In this case, the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 include a first holding area RE1 → a second holding area when a winning in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 occurs plural times consecutively. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 are stored on hold. Further, the holding area RE includes a number-of-holds storage area NA. The number-of-holds storage area NA is used to specify the number of the winning histories to be stored in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. Is stored.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the main display unit 43. Based on various types of numerical information stored in the execution area AE, a determination as to whether or not a hit is made, distribution of the jackpot type, and determination of a variable display time are performed.

<Regarding Various Processes Executed by Main Controller 81>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process executed by the MPU 202 in the main control device 81 to advance a game in each game round will be described. In the MPU 202, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, a main process started upon power-on and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal to an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. However, description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This process is started by the MPU 202 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, various winning switches are read. That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 81 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Then, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In the following step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are each incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 204. After that, in step S104, a winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning in the operating ports 33 and 34 is executed, and in step S105, the winning process for the passing in accordance with the winning in the through gate 35 is executed. Then, the timer interrupt processing ends.

  The winning process for the operating port in step S104 and the winning process for the through in step S105 will be described below.

<Winning process for working port>
First, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the winning processing for the operating port, first, in step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won one of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port. If the game ball has not won any of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, the main prize processing ends. If the game ball has won either the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34, the value stored in the reserved number storage area NA of the reserved ball storage area 232 is read in step S202, It is determined whether or not the number N of reserved starting balls stored in the area RE is less than an upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment).

  If the number N of reserve balls for starting is equal to or more than the upper limit value, the main prize processing is ended as it is. If the number N of reserve start balls is less than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S203, and the number N of reserve start balls is incremented (added) by one. In the following step S204, the values (each numerical information) of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S103 are stored in the empty reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of the reservation area RE. It is stored in the first reserved area, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the reserved storage number incremented by one in step S203.

  In the subsequent steps S205 and S206, the voice lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 recognize that the winning in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 has occurred, and the display control device 212 executes a hold notice. Then, a confirmation process for a reservation notice and a setting process of a reservation command are executed. After that, the main winning process ends.

  Hereinafter, the confirmation processing for the suspension notice and the setting processing of the suspension command will be described.

  First, the confirmation processing for the suspension notice in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the confirmation process for suspension notice, in step S301, information on the suspension number stored in the suspension number storage area NA in the suspension area RE is read, and the information on the suspension number is stored in a register of the MPU 202. In the subsequent step S302, the information obtained for the jackpot determination, that is, the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1, is obtained from the hold information acquired in step S204 based on the current prize in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. Understand information.

  In the following step S303, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the RAM 204, thereby determining whether or not the current winning / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode. In the case of the low probability mode, in step S304, referring to the low probability mode success / failure table shown in FIG. 10A, the information for the big hit determination grasped in the step S302 is set as the big hit winning. Specified information is included. If the mode is the high probability mode, the information for the jackpot determination grasped in the step S302 is referred to as the jackpot determination in step S305 by referring to the winning / non-permission table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. Specify whether it is included in the set information.

  After step S304 or step S305, in step S306, it is determined whether the information for jackpot determination grasped in step S302 corresponds to the jackpot winning. If it corresponds to the jackpot winning, in step S307, the information for determining the type of the hold information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, ie, the jackpot The information acquired from the information updated by the type counter C2 is grasped.

  In the following step S308, referring to the distribution table shown in FIG. 10B, the information for jackpot type determination grasped in step S307 is information set as a normal jackpot result or information set as a probable change jackpot result. Identify which is included. Then, in step S309, it is determined whether or not the information for the jackpot type grasped in step S307 corresponds to the normal jackpot result. If it corresponds to the normal jackpot result, the normal jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S310. If it corresponds to the positive jackpot result, the register of the MPU 202 is positively changed in step S311. Memorize the jackpot information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S306, if the process in step S310 is performed, or if the process in step S311 is performed, the process proceeds to step S312. In step S312, information obtained from the hold information acquired in step S304 based on the current prize in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is information for determining the out-of-reach, that is, information obtained from information updated by the reach random number counter C3. Understand information.

  In the following step S313, the reach determined in step S312 is referred to by referring to the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of the ROM 203. It is determined whether the information for determination is included in the information set as the reach winning. Thereafter, in step S314, it is determined whether the reach determination information grasped in step S312 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. If it corresponds to the occurrence of the reach, in step S315, after the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, the present confirmation processing ends. If it does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, this confirmation processing is ended as it is.

  Next, a description will be given, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 14, of the processing for setting the hold command in step S206 in the winning processing for the operating port (FIG. 12).

  In the hold command setting processing, in step S401, it is determined whether or not either the normal jackpot information or the probable change jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, thereby confirming the immediately preceding hold notice (FIG. 13). ), It is determined whether or not the information for the jackpot determination is identified as corresponding to the jackpot winning. If either the normal jackpot information or the probable change jackpot information is stored, in step S402, it is determined whether or not the information is the probable change jackpot information. In 13), it is determined whether or not the information for type determination has been identified as corresponding to the probability change jackpot result.

  If the jackpot information is positive jackpot information, a probable change corresponding suspension command is set in step S403, and if it is normal jackpot information, a normal corresponding hold command is set in step S404. The setting of the above commands and the setting of various commands to be described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 204.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S401 that both the normal jackpot information and the probable variable jackpot information are not stored, the process proceeds to step S405, and it is determined whether the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. Accordingly, it is determined whether or not the information for reach determination is specified to correspond to the occurrence of reach in the immediately preceding confirmation processing for hold notice (FIG. 13). If the reach occurrence information is stored, a departure reach correspondence suspension command is set in step S406, and if the reach occurrence information is not stored, a complete departure correspondence suspension command is set in step S407. I do.

  After executing any of the processes of step S403, step S404, step S406, or step S407, in step S408, a process of setting information on the number of held items to the above-mentioned held command is executed. Specifically, the information of the set pending command is configured as a plurality of bytes of information, and for some of the bits, information indicating that the command is a pending command, And information on the number of items to be suspended can be set. In this case, in step S408, first, the information of the held number stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S401 in the confirmation processing for the immediately preceding held notice (FIG. 13) is read, and then the already set hold command The information of the reserved number read out is stored in the bits for the information of the reserved number by the arithmetic processing such as the logical sum. With this, for the hold command set in any of the processes of step S403, step S404, step S406, or step S407, the number of the hold information corresponding to the hold command is specified. Information is included.

  After performing the processing in step S408, the setting processing ends. The hold command including the information on the number of holds in step S408 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 by the external output process of step S601 in the next normal process (FIG. 16). The audio ramp control device 82 specifies that the hold information has increased by receiving the hold command. Further, the audio lamp control device 82 transmits the hold command to the display control device 212 as it is. The display control device 212 executes a process of a hold notice based on the received hold command. This processing will be described later in detail.

  The setting method of the hold command is to specify whether the jackpot is won by the hold command in the display control device 212, the type of the jackpot at the time of the jackpot win, and the presence or absence of the reach if the jackpot is not won by the hold command. Is optional as long as it can be performed. For example, a combination of a probable-change support command, a normal support command, an out-of-reach support command, and a complete out-of-control command are individually set in accordance with the number of items to be held. It is also possible to select one pending command in accordance with the result of the confirmation in the confirmation process (FIG. 13).

<Prize processing for through>
Next, the winning processing for through will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S501, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the through gate 35. When it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 35, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the number SN of stored bonuses is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment).

  The game proceeds to step S503 on condition that the game ball wins the through gate 35 and that the number of stored bonus items SN <4, and the number of stored bonus items SN is incremented by one. Subsequently, in step S504, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the first one of the free storage areas of the electric utility holding area 233 of the RAM 204. Then, after the third holding lamp unit 47 of the variable display unit 36 corresponding to the number of held storages is turned on, the final winning processing is ended. The third holding lamp section 47 is sequentially turned on from the left side. For example, if the number of storage items SN for holdings is 1, the third holding lamp section 47 at the left end is turned on, and the number of storages SN for holdings for the accessory is reduced. If it is 4, all the third holding lamps 47 are turned on.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S501 that a game ball has won the through gate 35, or if the value of the number of stored bonuses SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit in step S502, the electric accessory release counter C4 The final prize processing is ended without storing the value of.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of the normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after a main process started upon power-on is executed. In the normal process, main processes of a game are executed. As an outline, the processing in steps S601 to S607 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing in steps S608 and S609 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the normal processing, in step S601, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines whether there is a prize ball command, and if a prize ball command is set, transmits it to the payout control device 97. If an effect command such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, or the like is set, the command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 82.

  Next, in step S602, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by one, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In a succeeding step S603, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormal signal received from the payout control device 97 are read. Thereafter, in step S604, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In this game round control processing, a jackpot determination, setting of symbol variable display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the main display unit 43, and the like are performed. The details of the game round control process will be described later.

  After that, in step S605, a game state shift process for shifting the game state is executed. Although the details will be described later, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like by the game state shift processing.

  In step S606, a power support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is executed. In the electric role support processing, determination is made as to whether or not the electric character accessory 34a is to be opened, and display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed. The details of the electronic role support process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S607, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, the update of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing (steps S608 and S609). That is, in step S608, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In step S609, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of steps S601 to S606 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random. The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<Game round control process>
Next, the game round control processing in step S604 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, first, in step S701, it is determined whether the mode is the open / close execution mode. If the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the game play is executed without executing any of the processing after step S702, that is, the game turn start processing of steps S703 to S705 and the game turn progression processing of steps S706 to S709. The control processing ends.

  If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S702 whether the main display unit 43 is performing variable display. If the main display unit 43 is not performing the variable display, the process proceeds to the game times start processing of steps S703 to S705. In the game start process, first, in step S703, it is determined whether or not the number N of pending start balls is “0”. The case where the number N of reserved balls for starting is “0” means that the reserved information is not stored in the reserved ball storage area 232. Therefore, the present game round control process is terminated.

  If the number N of reserve balls to be started is not “0”, a data setting process for setting data stored in the reserve area RE of the reserve ball storage area 232 for variable display is executed in step S704. Further, after performing the fluctuation start processing for starting the fluctuation display on the main display unit 43 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 41 in step S705, the game round control processing ends.

  Here, the data setting process in step S704 and the change start process in step S705 will be described in detail below.

  First, the data setting process in step S704 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the data setting process, first, in step S801, the number N of balls reserved for starting is decremented by one. In the following step S802, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is moved to the execution area AE.

  Thereafter, in step S803, a process of shifting the data (that is, the hold information) stored in each of the hold areas RE1 to RE4 of the hold area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth reservation areas RE1 to RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second data. The data in each area is shifted in the order of the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3.

  In a succeeding step S804, a shift command is set which is information for causing the voice lamp control device 82 to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. Thereafter, the data setting process ends. The shift command set in step S804 is transmitted to audio ramp control device 82 in step S601 in the normal processing (FIG. 16). Upon receiving the shift command, the audio lamp control device 82 executes a process for changing the display on the first holding lamp unit 45 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings.

  Next, the change start processing in step S705 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the change start process, first, in step S901, a hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not the hold information corresponding to the current change start process corresponds to a jackpot winning. Specifically, it acquires the information for the jackpot determination from the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information obtained from the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1. Then, when the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode, by referring to the low / probability mode winning / rejecting table in the ROM 203, it is specified whether the grasped information is included in the information corresponding to the big hit winning. When the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the CPU refers to the high-probability mode success / failure table in the ROM 203 to specify whether or not the grasped information is included in the information corresponding to the jackpot winning.

  In a succeeding step S902, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination processing in the step S901 is a result corresponding to the jackpot winning. If the result corresponds to the jackpot, the type determination process is executed in step S903.

  In the type determination processing, information for type determination, that is, information acquired from information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 among information stored in the execution area AE is grasped. Further, by referring to the distribution table in the ROM 203, it is specified whether or not the information for determining the type thus determined is included in the information corresponding to the result of the probability change jackpot.

  In a succeeding step S904, it is determined whether or not the type of the current big hit winning is a probability-change big hit result based on the information specified in the type determining process in the step S903. If it is a probability variable jackpot result, a stop result setting process for a probability variable jackpot is executed in step S905, and if not, a stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed in step S906. If it is determined in step S902 that the winning is not a big hit, in step S907, a stop result setting process for a miss is executed.

  In each of the stop result setting processes in steps S905 to S907, information of a pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is specified from information stored in the ROM 203 in advance, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 204. Remember. Also, in step S905 and step S906, information for specifying by the MPU 202 that the result of the success / failure determination of the current game round is the probability change jackpot result or the normal jackpot result is stored in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 ( The information of "1" is stored in the corresponding area). Specifically, in step S905, a probability variable jackpot flag is stored, and in step S906, a normal jackpot flag is stored.

  After executing any one of steps S905 to S907, a variable display time setting process is executed in step S908.

  In the process of setting the variable display time, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, first, in step S1001, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer 231 of the RAM 204 is acquired. , MPU 202.

  In a succeeding step S1002, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the probability variable jackpot flag and the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If any of the flags is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1002 as the occurrence of the reach display. Even if none of the above flags are stored, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, the reach display is not generated. In step S1002, an affirmative determination is made. In specifying the presence or absence of the reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 203 is referred to.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, the value of the present fluctuation type counter CS is referred to in step S1003 by referring to the reach generation fluctuation display time table stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203. Is obtained, and in step S1004, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area (variable display time measuring means) provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  Here, the reach display includes a normal reach display and a super reach display in which the variable display modes are different from each other. In the reach display variable display time table, the variable display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set, and by referring to the table, the variable display time information corresponding to each reach display is obtained. Is obtained. For determining the type of reach display, a table is provided in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS, and by referring to the table, the value of the current variation type counter CS is calculated. The corresponding reach display is determined.

  Furthermore, the reach display variable display time table corresponds to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the variable display time is set so that the combination of specific symbols can be stopped and displayed in the case of the probability variable jackpot result, and the combination of non-specific symbols can be stopped and displayed in the case of the normal jackpot result. , A variable display time is set. Details will be described later.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1002, the fluctuation display time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 223 in step S1005 is referred to to determine the current fluctuation type counter CS. The variable display time corresponding to the value is acquired, and in step S1006, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  Note that the variable display time information when no reach occurs is set such that the larger the number of start-reserved balls N, the shorter the variable display time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of start-reserved balls N may be employed. The smaller the number of start-reserved balls N, the shorter the variable display time is set. Is also good. In addition, in a situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, a reach time is set so that a shorter variable display time is selected as compared with a case where the number of hold information is the same as in the case where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. Although the variable display time table for generation is set, the present invention is not limited to this. The variable display time to be selected may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above-described configuration may be applied to the variable display time when a reach occurs, and the variable display time that is easy to be selected and the variable display time that is difficult to be selected are different between the jackpot winning and the off-reach. It may be configured. In addition, the variable display time table for the probability change jackpot, the variable display time table for the normal jackpot, the variable display time table for the off-reach, and the variable display time table for the complete departure may be individually set.

  As described above, the fluctuation display time of each game is determined by using the presence / absence of reach, the type of reach display, the number of hold information, and the value of the fluctuation type counter as parameters. However, the variable display time of each game time is a parameter of the content of the other hold information, specifically, the information for the jackpot determination, the information for the type determination, and the information for the reach determination included in the other hold information as parameters. Determined without having to do it.

  Returning to the description of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 19), after executing the fluctuation display time setting processing in step S908, a fluctuation command and a type command are set in step S909. The fluctuation command includes information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time. The type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes, as the game result information, information on the probability change jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, information on the off result, and the like.

  The change command and the type command set in step S909 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 82 in step S601 in the normal processing (FIG. 16). The sound lamp control device 82 determines a light emission pattern of the display lamp unit 63 and a sound output pattern from the speaker unit 64 in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and determines the determined effect. The display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled so that the process is executed. In addition, the sound lamp control device 82 transmits the above-mentioned change command and type command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 212 determines a variation display pattern on the symbol display device 41 in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and executes the variation display pattern so that the determined variation display pattern is executed. 41 is display-controlled. After that, in step S910, the variation display of the picture is started on the main display unit 43, and then the variation start processing is ended.

  Returning to the description of the game turn control process (FIG. 17), when the main display unit 43 is performing variable display, the game turn progression process of steps S706 to S709 is executed. In the game time progress processing, first, in step S706, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display time of the current game time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 has become “0”. As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 20). The value of the set variable display time information is decremented (subtracted) by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, a variable display process is executed in step S707. In the variable display process, the display mode on the main display unit 43 is changed. Thereafter, the game times control process ends.

  If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S708. In the fluctuation end processing, the information stored in the RAM 204 in any one of the above-described steps S905 to S907 is specified, and the main display unit 43 displays a picture pattern corresponding to the information. The display of the unit 43 is controlled.

  In a succeeding step S709, a fluctuation end command is set. Thereafter, the game times control process ends. The change end command set in step S709 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S601 in the normal processing (FIG. 16). The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the received change end command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. Upon receiving the change end command, the display control device 212 determines and displays the final stop symbol combination (final stop display) in the game time.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the gaming state transition processing in step S605 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the operation mode is the open / close execution mode. If the opening / closing execution mode is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined whether or not the timing at which the variation display of the pattern on the main display unit 43 of one game time has ended. If it is not the timing at which the variable display has ended, the present game state transition processing ends.

  If it is the timing at which the variable display has ended, in step S1103, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game round corresponds to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the normal jackpot flag and the probable variable jackpot flag are stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition processing ends.

  If any of the above flags is stored, "15" is set in the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1104. The round counter area RC is a counter area for counting the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened. Thereafter, the present game state transition processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the open / close execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, and the process proceeds to step S1105. In step S1105, a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed. In the special winning opening opening / closing process, when the special winning opening 32a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 32c is driven under the condition that the round counter area RC is equal to or more than "1". The mouth 32a is opened. When the special winning opening 32a is open, the variable winning driving is performed on the condition that a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 32a or that a predetermined number of game balls have won. The driving state of the part 32c is stopped, and the special winning opening 32a is closed.

  In a succeeding step S1106, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is “0”. If the value of the round counter area RC is not “0”, the present game state transition processing is terminated. If the value of the round counter area RC is “0”, a transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is performed in step S1107.

  In the transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, when the probability change jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. Note that the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next time a jackpot is won. If the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, the winning / rejection lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode is ended when the number of game times has continued 100 times, and then the game mode shifts to the normal game state in which the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  Then, in step S1108, after executing the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the present game state transition processing ends. In the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the stored flag is deleted from the normal jackpot flag or the probable change jackpot flag.

<Process for electrical support>
Next, the process for supporting electric power in step S606 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a supported flag is stored in the supported flag storage area provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The supporting flag is a flag stored when the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is opened, and is deleted when the electric accessory 34a is returned to the closed state.

  If the support flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether or not the support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the open state is won in the lottery for determining whether or not to bring the electric accessory 34a into the open state, and is deleted when the supporting flag is stored.

  If the support winning flag has not been stored, the process advances to step S1203 to determine whether the value of the second timer area T2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is "0". If the value of the second timer area T2 is not "0", the power-supply support process is terminated.

  If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not it is the end timing of the variable display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44. If it is the end timing of the variable display, in step S1205, after setting the departure display, the process for supporting the electric role is ended. By setting the off display, the change display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44 is terminated in a state where the off display is stopped and displayed.

  If the value of the second timer area T2 is "0" and it is not the end timing of the variable display, it is determined in step S1206 whether the value of the storage number SN of the accessory storage is larger than "0". If the value of the bonus storage number SN is “0”, the electrical-principle support process is terminated. If the value of the number of storage items SN for holdings is larger than "0", it is determined in step S1207 whether the mode is the open / close execution mode and whether the mode is the high frequency support mode in step S1208. .

  If the mode is not the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode, an open lottery is performed in step S1209. Specifically, the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area is shifted, and when the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, it is determined that the open lottery is won. Become. At the same time as the open lottery, “750” (that is, 1.5 seconds) is set in the second timer area T2. The second accessory timer area T2 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing is started.

  In a succeeding step S1210, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in the step S1209 is a support winning. If the support has not been won, the process proceeds to step S1212 without executing the processing of step S1211. If the support has been won, the support win flag is stored in step S1211 and provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. After “3” is set in the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S1212.

  In step S1212, it is determined whether the win / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1212, the present electrical role support process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1212, it is determined in step S1213 whether or not the number-of-games counter area is "0". The game frequency counter is decremented by one each time one game is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If the number-of-games counter area is not "0", the processing for the present electric role support is ended as it is. If the number-of-games counter area is “0”, the high frequency support flag is deleted in step S1214, and then the processing for supporting the electric role is ended.

  If the mode is the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode, an open lottery is performed in step S1215. Specifically, the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area is shifted, and when the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, it is determined that the open lottery is won. Become. At the same time as the open lottery, "14750" (that is, 29.5 seconds) is set in the second timer area T2.

  In a succeeding step S1216, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in the step S1215 is a support winning. If the support has not been won, the main support process ends. If the support has been won, the support winning flag is stored in step S1217, and “1” is set in the second round counter area RC2, after which the main support process ends.

  If the support winning flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, and the flow advances to step S1218 to determine whether the value of the second timer area T2 is "0". If the value of the second timer area T2 is not “0”, the display of the pattern is being displayed on the accessory display section 44, and thus the main electric support process ends. If the value of the second timer area T2 is "0", a hit display is set in step S1219. Thus, the variation display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44 is terminated in a state where the hit display is stopped and displayed. In subsequent step S1220, the support-in-progress flag is stored, and the support winning flag is deleted.

  If the under-support flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1221 to execute the electric-power opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a, and thereafter, terminates the electric-power supporting process. The electric-power opening / closing control processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined based on whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in a driving state. If the electric accessory 34a is open, the process advances to step S1302 to determine whether the value of the second timer area T2 is "0".

  If the value of the second timer area T2 is not "0", the main control opening / closing process is terminated. If the value of the second timer area T2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1303, where a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to a closed state is performed, and "250" (that is, 0.5 sec.) Is stored in the second timer area T2. ) Is set.

  Then, in step S1304, after decrementing the value of the second round counter area RC2 by 1, it is determined in step S1305 whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0”, the main power switch opening / closing process is terminated as it is, and if the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”, the support flag is cleared. After this, the electric utility opening / closing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is being opened, an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, and the process proceeds to step S1307. In step S1307, it is determined whether or not the second timer area T2 is “0”. If the second timer area T2 is not "0", the electric power opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If the second timer area T2 is "0", in step S1308, an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to an open state is executed.

  Then, in step S1309, it is determined whether the mode is the open / close execution mode, and in step S1310, it is determined whether the mode is the high frequency support mode. If the mode is not the open / close execution mode and the high-frequency support mode, "800" (that is, 1.6 seconds) is set in the second timer area T2 in step S1311, and then the present electrical hand open / close process ends. On the other hand, in the case of the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode, in step S1312, “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the second timer area T2, and then the present electrical hand opening / closing process ends. .

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device 82 and Display Control Device 212>
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 242 is mounted on an audio ramp control board 241 provided in the audio ramp control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 242, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 243. This is an element having a built-in RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be configured as an individual chip.

  The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main controller 81, the previously described hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as the operation winning command, the shift command, the special advantage start command, and the special advantage end command are received. In addition, it receives game time control commands (game time control information) such as a change command, a type command, and a change end command. In addition, an opening / closing execution mode command (opening / closing execution mode information) such as an opening command and an ending command is received.

  As described above, the output lamps of the MPU 242 are connected to the holding lamps 45 to 47 provided on the variable display unit 36 and the display lamps 63 and the speaker 64 provided on the front door frame 14. In addition, a display control device 212 is connected. The MPU 242 of the audio lamp control device 82 transmits the command for determining the variable display pattern received from the main control device 81 and the command relating to the advance notice to the display control device 212 without change.

  The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257, each of which is an element in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into a chip, are mounted. It has. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 253 and the work RAM 254 be integrated into one chip for the MPU 252, and each may be configured individually as a chip.

  The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 determines the variation display pattern of each game time on the symbol display device 41 based on receiving a command from the main control device 81 via the audio lamp control device 82, Such processing is executed, and in the VDP 255, drawing processing is executed on the video RAM 257 in accordance with the processing result, whereby various images are displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. In performing these processes, various types of information stored in the areas 311 to 320 of the ROM 253 are used, and the areas 321 to 334 of the RAM 254 are used. Details of these areas will be described together with the processing executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212.

  The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 255 is called an “rendering chip” because it is formed as an IC chip, and the substance thereof can be called a microcomputer chip having firmware dedicated for rendering processing. The VDP 255 adjusts respective timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, and the like, intervenes in reading and writing of data, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 256 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 256 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  Note that a plurality of character ROMs 256 may be provided, and image data and the like may be stored in each of the character ROMs 256. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

  The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257.

<Regarding Command Handling Process Executed by Display Control Device 212>
Next, a process executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 will be described. The processes executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 are roughly classified into a hold command handling process and a variable display control process. Therefore, these processes will be described below.

<Pending command processing>
The pending command handling process will be described below. The hold command processing is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle). In the pending command processing, when a pending command transmitted by the main control device 81 has been received, processing corresponding to information included in the received pending command is executed.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 25, in the suspension command handling processing, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether a probable change suspension command or a normal handling suspension command has been received. Here, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 receives a command from the audio lamp control device 82, and the received command is temporarily stored in the command storage area 321 of the work RAM 254. The command storage area 321 is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can read from the previously stored command. Even when a plurality of commands are received at the same time, Processing corresponding to each command can be favorably executed. In the determination in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a probable-change-supported command or a normal-supported command has been received in the area to be read this time in the command storage area 321. Note that the configuration for reading such a command is the same for the following command reading.

  If a certain-variable-response pending command or a normal-response pending command has been received, in step S1502, information on the number of pending positions included in the command received this time is specified, and the information on the specified reserved number is provided in the work RAM 254. It is set in the erase counter area 322 that has been input. In the following step S1503, it is determined whether or not a jackpot hold flag (jackpot hold information) is stored in the jackpot hold flag storage area (jackpot hold information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 334 of the work RAM 254. If the jackpot hold flag is stored, this processing is terminated as it is. If the jackpot hold flag is not stored, the jackpot hold flag is stored in step S1504.

  Here, the jackpot hold flag means that, when the hold information stored in the main control device 81 includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 indicates the hold information. This is information for identification. If the jackpot hold flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1503 even if a positive change corresponding hold command or a normal corresponding hold command is received, and a jackpot for performing various settings for performing a hold advance notice. The setting process of correspondence is not executed. Accordingly, in a situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win has already been stored in the main control device 81, even if the hold information acquired based on a new prize in the operating ports 33 and 34 corresponds to the jackpot win. Various settings are not made in performing the suspension notice.

  The erasure counter area 322 is a measuring means for specifying the timing of erasing the jackpot hold flag when the jackpot hold flag is stored. As will be described later, the information of the suspended number set in the erasing counter area 322 is updated so as to be decremented by one each time a new game starts, and after the updating, the information is stored in the erasing counter area 322. When the stored information is the initial value “0”, the jackpot hold flag is deleted.

  After storing the jackpot holding flag in step S1504, in step S1505, a notice is stored in a notification condition satisfaction flag storage area (notification condition satisfaction information storage means or notification condition satisfaction information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 334 of the work RAM 254. It is determined whether or not a condition satisfaction flag (notification condition satisfaction information or notification condition satisfaction information) is stored. The advance notice condition satisfaction flag is information for specifying, by the MPU 252, whether or not a situation in which the suspension notice is already set is stored when the condition for executing the suspension notice is satisfied, This information is deleted when the condition for terminating the suspension notice is satisfied.

  If the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, and the corresponding process ends. In other words, in the situation where the suspension notice has already been set, various settings for performing the suspension notice are not performed even if a probable change corresponding suspension command or a normal correspondence suspension command is newly received.

  If the notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, in step S1506, the jackpot response setting process is executed, and then the response process ends.

  Here, the jackpot handling setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the jackpot response setting process, first, in step S1601, a hold announcement generation lottery process is executed. In the hold announcement occurrence lottery process, a counter value (numerical information) for the hold announcement occurrence lottery is read from the lottery counter area 323 of the work RAM 254. Here, the lottery counter area 323 is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is incremented by one every time the hold command corresponding process (FIG. 25) is started, that is, in a cycle of about 2 msec. The configuration is such that it is initialized to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Then, in the hold notice generation lottery process, the above-mentioned read-out is performed with reference to the lottery table (notice lottery information group) stored in the lottery table storage area (notice lottery information group storage means) 311 of the program ROM 253. It is determined whether or not the counter value for the lottery for holding the preliminary announcement corresponds to the winning for the preliminary announcement occurrence. The probability of winning the hold notice is arbitrary, but in the present pachinko machine 10, the lottery table is set such that the hold notice occurs with a probability of 7/10 in the case of the jackpot handling setting process. .

  In a succeeding step S1602, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in the above-described step S1601 is a winning of the suspension notice generation. If the hold announcement has not been won, the setting process ends. If it is determined that the suspension notice has been generated, the process advances to step S1603.

  In step S1603, it is determined whether the suspension command received this time is a normal correspondence suspension command. If the command is a normal response suspension command, in step S1604, a process of determining a symbol for notice corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed. In the process of deciding the symbol for the notice that usually corresponds to the jackpot, the type of the symbol used in performing the current reservation announcement is determined from the symbols with the even-numbered symbols which are the main symbols corresponding to the non-specific symbols. The processing of is performed.

  Here, in the present pachinko machine 10, as described above, the main control device 81 determines whether or not the symbol is changed in each game time, whether or not a jackpot is won in each game time, and the type of the jackpot result in the case of the jackpot win. In the case of not winning a jackpot, whether or not a reach has occurred and the variable display time at each game round are determined. At the end of each game round, the type of the symbol to be finally stopped and the final stop display are displayed. The variable display pattern up to is determined by the display control device 212. In this case, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 uses the symbol update counter area 324 and the symbol information acquisition area 325 provided in the work RAM 254 to determine the type of the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed. I have.

  Specifically, the symbol update counter area 324 is provided with a counter area for an upper symbol row, a counter area for a middle symbol row, and a counter area for a lower symbol row. The counter value corresponding to the number of symbols set in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41 is set. That is, as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 correspond to the fact that 18 symbols are set as the total number of the main symbol and the sub symbol, and the counter for the upper symbol row is set. A numerical range of “0 to 17” is set in the area and the counter area for the lower symbol row. Also, in correspondence with the fact that 20 symbols are set as the total number of the main symbol and the sub symbol in the middle symbol row Z2, the counter area for the middle symbol row has a numerical value of “0-19”. A range has been set. The counter value for each symbol row is updated at different periods. Then, at a predetermined period (for example, 2 msec), all information updated in the counter area for each symbol row is acquired, and the acquired information is stored in the symbol information acquisition area 325.

  In this case, in the symbol information acquisition area 325, a normal jackpot area, a probable variable jackpot area, and a completely off area are set. Then, it is determined whether or not the information obtained from all of the counter areas for each symbol row corresponds to one of the normal jackpot result, the probable change jackpot result, and the complete loss, and the symbol information acquisition area 325 is determined. The information of the corresponding area is updated. When determining the type of symbol to be finally stopped and displayed for a completely out of play game which is not related to the reservation notice, the completely out of area of the symbol information acquisition area 325 is referred to and stored in the referred area. The display of the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line.

  On the other hand, in the normal reach display of the reach display, when determining the type of the symbol to be finally stopped for the game time of the jackpot or out-of-reach, it is stored in the middle symbol row stop result table storage area 312 provided in the program ROM 253. Refer to the middle symbol row stop result table. The middle symbol row stop result table is a table in which the stop result of the middle symbol row is uniquely determined with respect to the variable display time, and the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped according to the variable display time with reference to the table. Identify the result. Then, the stop result according to the specified middle symbol row Z2 and the game result are set, and the type of the symbol to be finally stopped is determined. In addition, in the process of steps S1003 and S1004 of the above-described variable display time setting process (FIG. 20), in the case of the normal reach display of the probability variable jackpot result, the variable display in which the specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. The time is set. On the other hand, in the case of the normal reach display of the normal jackpot result, the variable display time during which the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 is set.

  Returning to the description of the process of determining the symbol for the announcement corresponding to the normal jackpot, the determination process refers to the middle symbol row stop result table and specifies the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. Then, based on the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the stop result corresponding to the normal jackpot is specified. In subsequent step S1606, the information on the type of the symbol relating to the stop result corresponding to the normal jackpot is stored in the type information storage area 326 for the announcement symbol provided in the work RAM 254 as the type information of the symbol for the announcement.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1603 that the pending command received this time is a probable-change-capable pending command, in step S1605, a process of determining a notice symbol corresponding to the probable-change jackpot is executed. In the process, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is specified with reference to the middle symbol row stop result table. Then, based on the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the stop result corresponding to the probability change big hit is specified. In subsequent step S1606, the type information of the symbol related to the stop result corresponding to the probability change jackpot is stored in the type information storage area 326 for the notice as the type information of the notice symbol.

  After executing the processing in step S1606, a notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S1607. In the following step S1608, the information on the number of holds included in the hold command received this time is specified, and the information on the specified number of holds is set in the hold notice counter area 327 provided in the work RAM 254. The hold notice counter area 327 is a measuring means for specifying, by the MPU 252, which play time the hold information related to the setting corresponds to the hold information in the case where the hold notice is set. . As will be described later, the information of the reserved number set in the reserved notice counter area 327 is updated so as to be decremented by one each time a new game starts, and after the updated, the reserved notice counter area is updated. When the information stored in 327 is “0” which is the initial value, the notice condition satisfaction flag is cleared, and the state in which the suspension notice is set is released. After executing the processing in step S1608, the present setting processing ends.

  Returning to the description of the pending command corresponding processing (FIG. 25), if it is determined in step S1501 that both the probable change corresponding pending command and the normal corresponding pending command have not been received, in step S1507, the out-of-reach reach pending It is determined whether a command has been received. If no out-of-reach support command has been received, the process ends. In other words, in the hold command handling process, if a certain variation hold command, a normal hold command, or an out-of-reach reach hold command is received among a plurality of types of set hold commands, a setting for performing a hold advance notice is performed. However, if a complete departure-response suspension command is received, the setting for performing the suspension notice is not performed. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the setting of the hold notice is performed, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning based on the winning in the operating ports 33 and 34, or the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is displayed. Even if it is not acquired, it is limited to the case where the hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach is acquired, and if the hold information corresponding to complete departure is acquired, the setting for performing the advance notice is not performed.

  If it is determined in step S1507 that an off-reach-reach-response suspension command has been received, it is determined in step S1508 whether the jackpot suspension flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the jackpot hold flag is stored, the processing is terminated as it is. Accordingly, in a situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win has already been stored in the main control device 81, it is assumed that the hold information acquired based on the new winning in the operating ports 33 and 34 corresponds to the reach occurrence win. Also, various settings for performing the suspension notice are not performed.

  Here, as described above, even if a probable-change corresponding suspension command or a normal response suspension command is received, if the jackpot suspension flag is stored, the suspension command response processing is terminated as it is. . In other words, in the present pachinko machine 10, in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning has already been stored in the main control device 81, regardless of whether or not the situation is set to perform the hold notice, Even when a new prize is generated in the operating ports 33 and 34, various settings for performing the suspension notice are not performed.

  If it is determined in step S1508 that the jackpot hold flag is not stored, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not a notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1509, and the process ends. In other words, in the situation where the suspension notice has already been set, various settings for performing the suspension notice are not performed even if a new out-of-reach correspondence suspension command is received.

  Here, as described above, even when the probable-change corresponding suspension command or the normal correspondence suspension command is received, if the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, the suspension command corresponding processing is terminated as it is. did. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, in the situation where the setting for performing the reservation notice has already been made, even if a new prize is generated in the operating ports 33 and 34, various settings for performing the reservation notice are performed. I can't.

  If the advance notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S1509, and in step S1510, the out-reach reach correspondence setting process is executed, and then, the corresponding process ends.

  Here, the out-of-reach reach correspondence setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the out-of-reach correspondence setting process, first, in step S1701, a suspension notice occurrence lottery process is executed. The processing content of the hold announcement generation lottery processing is the same as the processing content described in step S1601. However, in the lottery table stored in the lottery table storage area 311, the probability of the occurrence of the hold notice is lower in the out-of-reach correspondence setting process than in the case of the big hit correspondence setting process (FIG. 26). It is set to be. In the case of such out-of-reach correspondence setting processing, the probability of winning the hold notice is arbitrary, but in the present pachinko machine 10, the lottery table is set such that the hold notice occurs with a probability of 1/10. I have.

  In a succeeding step S1702, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in the step S1701 is a winning of the suspension notice generation. If the hold announcement has not been won, the setting process ends. If it is determined that the suspension notice has been generated, the process advances to step S1703.

  In step S1703, a process of determining a symbol for notice corresponding to the out-of-reach is executed. In this process, the out-of-reach area in the symbol information acquisition area 325 is referred to. Then, in subsequent step S1704, the information on the type of the reach symbol stored in the out-of-reach area is stored in the type information storage area 326 for the notice symbol as the type information of the notice symbol.

  Then, in step S1705, a notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the work RAM 254. In the following step S1706, information on the number of holds included in the hold command received this time is specified, and the information on the specified number of holds is set in the hold notice counter area 327. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

<Variable display control processing>
The variable display control processing will be described below. The variable display control processing is started after the hold command corresponding processing (FIG. 25) is executed. In the variation display control process, when the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the symbol display device 41 starts the variation display of the symbols for one game, and the main control device 81 When the transmitted variation end command has been received, a process of finally displaying the symbol variation display is executed. In the variable display control process, a process for appropriately modifying the variable display pattern is performed in accordance with the setting for performing the suspension notice.

  First, a description will be given of a variable display control process when the execution condition of the suspension notice is not satisfied. Then, the variable display control process related to the suspension notice will be described.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the symbol display for one game is being displayed on the symbol display device 41. If the symbols for one game have not been displayed for fluctuation, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not the fluctuation command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If the fluctuation command has not been received, the fluctuation display control process is terminated. If the command for variation has been received, the process for starting variation is executed in step S1803, and then the variation display control process ends.

  On the other hand, if the symbols for one game are displayed in a variable manner, it is determined in step S1804 whether or not the variation end command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If the change end command has not been received, the process for changing is executed in step S1805, and then the change display control process ends. If the fluctuation end command has been received, the fluctuation display control processing ends after executing the fluctuation end processing in step S1806.

  Hereinafter, the fluctuation start processing in step S1803, the fluctuation processing in step S1805, and the fluctuation end processing in step S1806 will be described in detail.

<Change start process>
First, the fluctuation start processing in step S1803 will be described. The change start process is a process for starting the change display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 based on the reception of the change command transmitted from the main control device 81.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, in step S1901, the variation command received this time is read, and information on whether or not reach has occurred and information on the variation display time are specified from the command. Further, as described above, when transmitting the variation command, main controller 81 also transmits the type command. Therefore, in step S1901, the type command received together with the fluctuation command received this time is read, and game result information such as information on the probability variable jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, or information on the missed result is identified from the command. . Then, in step S1901, information on the presence or absence of a jackpot win is obtained from the above-identified information, information on the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, information on whether or not reach has occurred when the jackpot is not won, and the variable display time. And stores the obtained information in a register of the MPU 252.

  In a succeeding step S1902, it is determined whether or not a notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If it is determined that the advance notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, in step S1903, a stop result setting process not corresponding to the suspension notice is executed.

  The stop result setting process not corresponding to the suspension notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not a reach display occurs in the current game round. In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game time is a game time in which a big hit occurs or a reach occurs. If it is not a game round in which a reach has occurred, that is, if the game result is a completely off result, the process proceeds to step S2002.

  In step S2002, stop line determination processing is executed. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, five effective lines L1 to L5 are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and if a jackpot result is obtained, any one of the effective lines L1 to L5 is set. In the case where the combination of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed on L5 and the reach display is performed even when the result of the big hit is not obtained, the combination of the reach symbols is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5. . Furthermore, even when neither of the jackpot result nor the reach display is performed, when performing the suspension notice, the combination of the symbols for the suspension notice is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines. In this case, in the stop line determination process, a process for determining an effective line for stopping and displaying the combination of the above symbols is executed.

  In the stop line determination processing, a line information update area 328 provided in the work RAM 254 is used. Specifically, a numerical range of “0 to 4” is set in the line information update area 328 in correspondence with the number of active lines L1 to L5, and the counter value is set in the numerical range in a predetermined cycle. An update is performed. In the stop line determination process, the numerical information stored in the line information update area 328 at that time is obtained.

  Next, in step S2003, a symbol combination determination process is executed. In this process, the information stored at that time in the complete departure area of the symbol information acquisition area 325 is acquired.

  Next, storage processing of the address information of the stop information is executed. Specifically, the program ROM 253 is provided with a stop information table storage area 313 as stop information group storage means, and the stop information table storage area 313 stores a stop information table as a stop information group. . In the stop information table, address information is set in association with information on each of the activated lines L1 to L5 and information on a combination of each stop symbol. In the storage process of the address information of the stop information, in the stop information table, the stop information corresponding to the information of the stop line specified this time and the combination information of the symbols is specified, and the address information of the specified stop information is stored in the stop information. It is stored in the address storage area 329.

  On the other hand, if the reach display is generated, the process proceeds to step S2005, and it is determined whether the type of the current reach display is normal reach. If it is not normal reach, this means that the current reach display is a super reach display. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2006, and a super reach stop result setting process is executed. In this process, a stop result corresponding to the game result is determined.

  Here, the super reach display is a reach display in which the stop result can be adjusted regardless of the fluctuation display time. Thereby, the stop result corresponding to the game result can be stopped and displayed without changing the variable display time. Details of this will be described later. Then, stop information corresponding to the stop result is specified, and the address information of the specified stop information is stored in the stop information address storage area 329.

  On the other hand, if the current reach display is the normal reach display, an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, the process proceeds to step S2007, and a stop result grasp process for the middle symbol row Z2 is executed from the variable display time. Specifically, it refers to the middle symbol row stop result table. As shown in FIG. 31, in the middle symbol row stop result table, the stop results of each middle symbol row Z2 are set in one-to-one correspondence with the information of each variable display time. It is a table in which address information is set correspondingly. In detail, information indicating which symbol is to be stopped and displayed on which of the left line L1, the middle line L2, and the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2 is set corresponding to each variable display time. I have. In the middle symbol row Z2 stop result grasping process, the address information of the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 corresponding to the variable display time is acquired from the middle symbol row stop result table. The detailed relationship between the normal reach display and the variable display time will be described later.

  Then, in step S2008, it is determined from the information stored in the register of the MPU 252 whether or not a jackpot win occurs in the current game round.

  If a jackpot win occurs, a stop line determination process is executed in step S2009. In the stop line determination process, based on the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the combination of the jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot of the current game is stopped on any of the activated lines, of the probability jackpot or the normal jackpot. The information of the stop line is specified so as to be displayed. Specifically, the line in which the main symbol of the middle symbol column Z2 is stopped and displayed is specified, and the information of the stop line corresponding to the line is specified. More specifically, when it is specified that the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2 under the situation where the game result is the normal jackpot result, the left line L1 is set to be selected. On the other hand, when it is specified that the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2 under the situation where the game result is the probability change jackpot result, the right line L3 is selected. I have. Further, when it is specified that the main symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z, it is set to select any one of the middle line L2, the lower right line L4, or the upper right line L5. ing. The line information update area 328 used in the stop line determination processing in step S2002 is used for the selection.

  After that, in step S2010, a process of determining a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a big hit symbol) constituting a combination of the big hit symbols is executed. In this process, the big hit symbol is specified based on the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, in the middle symbol row Z2, a symbol stopped and displayed on the stop line determined in the above-described stop line determination process is set as the big hit symbol information. For example, it is specified that the symbol “1” is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and when the stop line is determined to be the left line L1, the symbol “1” is selected as the big hit symbol. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2011.

  In step S2011, a process of determining a combination of big hit symbols is executed. In this process, information on the combination of the jackpot symbol corresponding to the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the stop line determined in the stop line determination process, and the jackpot symbol determined by the jackpot symbol determination process. To identify. Specifically, a combination information table storage area 314 is provided in the program ROM 253, and a combination information table is stored in the combination information table storage area 314. The combination information table is a table in which information on the combination of the big hit symbols is set according to the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the stop line, and the big hit symbol. By referring to the table, the information of the symbol combination is specified.

  That is, the combination of the stop line and the big hit symbol is limited by specifying the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 from the variable display time. That is, the big hit symbol is determined based on the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 and the big hit type. As a result, the amount of information stored in advance can be reduced. On the other hand, since the variable display time is randomly determined in the main control device 81, diversification of the stop result is ensured.

  In the case of a normal jackpot, the variable display time is set so that at least a non-specific symbol (even symbol) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. Thereby, the combination of the big hit symbols corresponding to the normal big hit can be stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the case of the probability change jackpot, the variable display time is set so that at least the specific symbol (odd symbol) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. Thereby, it is possible to stop and display the combination of the jackpot symbols corresponding to the probability change jackpot. When it is specified that the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the combination of the non-specific symbol jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, and the specific symbol jackpot is determined during the open / close execution mode. A promotion effect process for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols may be separately provided. Thereby, motivation for a game can be increased.

  After that, in step S2012, the storage process of the address information of the stop information is executed. That is, the address information corresponding to the stop line information and the combination information of the big hit symbols is read from the stop information table of the stop information table storage area 313, and the read address information of the stop information is stored in the stop information address storage area 329. To be stored.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2008 that it is not a jackpot, it means that the game result is a missed reach result. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2013, and a stop result setting process for off-normal reach that does not correspond to the suspension notice is executed. In this process, the stop result that is the off-reach result is set without changing the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2.

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32, first, in step S2101, a stop line determination process is executed. In the stop line determination process, a process of determining a reach line for stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols is performed. Specifically, the numerical information stored in the line information update area 328 at that time is obtained.

  Thereafter, in the processing of steps S2102 to S2105, a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a reach symbol) constituting a combination of the reach symbols is determined. In this case, the reach symbol and the reach line are determined based on the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 on condition that the combination of the big hit symbols is not stopped and displayed on all the activated lines.

  First, in step S2102, a process of arbitrarily selecting a reach symbol is executed. Specifically, the reach symbol updating area 330 provided in the work RAM 254 is used. In detail, in the reach symbol update area 330, a numerical range of “0 to 8” is set corresponding to the number of the reach symbols “1” to “9”, and the numerical value range is set at a predetermined cycle. Updating of the counter value is performed in the range. In the reach symbol determination process, the numerical information stored in the reach symbol update area 330 at that time is acquired.

  After that, in step S2103, the big hit stop line change table stored in the stop line change table storage area 315 provided in the program ROM 253 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 33, the big hit stop line change table is a table in which a pattern in which a combination of big hit symbols is stopped and displayed from the stop result, the reach line, and the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is extracted in advance. . In step S2104, it is determined whether or not the combination of the stop result, the reach symbol, and the reach line of the current middle symbol row Z2 corresponds to the combination set in the jackpot stop line change table. Thereby, whether or not the stop result of the currently selected middle symbol row Z2, the reach line, and the stop result determined by the reach symbol is a stop result in which the combination of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines. Is determined.

  If the result of the determination is negative, the process proceeds to step S2106. On the other hand, if the determination result is affirmative, it means that the combination of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed, so that the reach line is changed in step S2105. In the process, the reach line is changed so that the combination of the big hit symbols is not stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the big hit stop line change table, a change reach line is set according to a combination of the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the reach symbol, and the reach line. The change reach line is a reach line set based on the stop result and the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 so that the combination of the big hit symbols is not stopped and displayed. In the reach line changing process, the reach line is changed to the changed reach line, and the process proceeds to step S2106.

  Note that, instead of the configuration for changing the reach line, a configuration for changing the reach design may be adopted. Further, when the reach symbol is determined, a reach symbol that is a combination of big hit symbols may be excluded in advance according to the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 and the reach line. In short, the stop line and the reach symbol according to the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 may be determined on condition that the combination of the big hit symbols is not stopped and displayed.

  In step S2106, a process of determining a combination of reach symbols is executed. In this process, by referring to the combination information table, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the stop line determined in the stop line determination process or the change reach line changed in the reach line change process, and the reach The reach symbol determined by the symbol determination process and the information of the combination of the reach symbols corresponding to the reach symbol are specified. Note that the reach symbol refers to two symbols except the middle symbol row Z2, and the combination of reach symbols refers to a combination of three symbols including a stop result of the middle symbol row Z2.

  After that, in step S2107, the storage process of the address information of the stop information is executed. That is, the address information corresponding to the stop line information and the combination information of the reach symbol is read from the stop information table of the stop information table storage area 313, and the read stop information address information is stored in the stop information address storage area 329. To be stored.

  Returning to the description of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 29), after executing the processing of step S1903, the processing of setting the fluctuation display pattern is executed in step S1904. In the variable display pattern setting process, the variable display pattern table (variable display mode information group) as the variable display pattern table storage area (variable display mode information group storage unit) 316 provided in the program ROM 253 is referred to, and step S1901 is performed. The variable display pattern information corresponding to both the variable display time information stored in the register of the MPU 252 and the information stored in the stop information address storage area 329 in step S1903 is specified.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, the variable display pattern table sets the variable display pattern information in a one-to-one correspondence with an arbitrary combination of each variable display time information and each stop information. In addition, address information is set corresponding to the information of each variable display pattern. In the variable display pattern setting process in step S1904, in the variable display pattern table, the address information corresponding to the combination of the variable display time information and the stop information already specified this time is specified, and the specified address information is used as the work information. It is stored in a pattern information address storage area 331 provided in the RAM 254.

  By storing the address information of the variation display pattern in the storage area 331 of the pattern information address, the MPU 252 generates an internal command for the VDP 255 by an internal command output process (not shown) different from the variation start process. Then, the symbol display device 41 is driven so that the symbol corresponding to the variable display pattern set this time is displayed. In this case, the output processing of the internal command is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). In the output processing of the internal command, the internal command corresponding to the information of the set variable display pattern is displayed. It is generated in accordance with the elapsed time from the start of the variable display, and the generated internal command is output to the VDP 255. The VDP 255 reads image data from the character ROM 256 in accordance with the internal command, and writes the read image data to the video RAM 257. Thus, the symbol display corresponding to the variable display pattern set this time is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  In addition, the information of the variable display pattern stored in the variable display pattern table includes not only the contents of the variable display of the symbol, but also the information of the background image displayed together with the variable display of the symbol and the case where the reach effect is performed. The information of the image of the reach effect is also included. Therefore, when an internal command corresponding to the set fluctuation indication pattern is output to the VDP 255, the background image is displayed together with the fluctuation display of the symbol, and when various effects such as a reach effect are performed, the relevant effect is performed. The effect image is displayed.

  However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the information of the symbol display pattern (first display pattern information) and the information of other display patterns (second display pattern information) are distinguished. May be configured to include only the information on the variable display mode, and the information on the other display patterns may include the information on the background image and the information on the image of the reach effect when the reach effect is performed. In this case, when correcting a variable display pattern to be described later, a configuration may be used in which both the information on the symbol display pattern and the information on the other display patterns are corrected, or a configuration in which only the information on the symbol display pattern is corrected. Furthermore, the information of the symbol display pattern is individually provided for the upper symbol column Z1 as the first symbol column, the middle symbol column Z2 as the second symbol column, and the lower symbol column Z3 as the third symbol column. The set configuration may be used. In this case, when correcting a variable display pattern to be described later, a configuration may be adopted in which only the information of the symbol display pattern of the symbol row to be corrected is corrected.

  Here, the fluctuation display pattern of the reach display will be described. First, the normal reach display will be described with reference to FIG. 35, and then the super reach display will be described.

  In the normal reach display, the output result of the internal command is executed so as to perform the variable display described below, so that the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is uniquely determined from the variable display time.

  Specifically, first, when the change is started, as shown in FIG. 35 (a), the identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 becomes impossible or difficult in appearance. High-speed fluctuation display (or first speed display) is executed. Then, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the change, first, for the upper symbol row Z1, a high-speed operation is performed so that the symbols displayed in the display screen G in the upper symbol row Z1 can be easily identified in appearance. The display is switched from the fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display (or the second speed display slower than the first speed display). After that, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), the variable display in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped, and the identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the lower symbol row Z3 is performed for the lower symbol row Z3. Is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display so as to make the appearance easier. Then, the variable display in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped as shown in FIG. In this case, the same symbol is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines in the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z3. This timing is referred to as reach generation timing.

  At the reach timing, the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display in the middle symbol row Z2 so that the symbols displayed in the display screen G in the middle symbol row Z2 can be easily identified in appearance. At the same time, the symbol position adjustment process is executed. In the symbol position adjustment process, the symbol position of the middle symbol row Z2 is adjusted such that the symbol “1” of the middle symbol row Z2 passes through the middle line L2 at the timing of switching from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display. You. More specifically, an internal command for outputting the position of the predetermined symbol is output to the VDP 255 at a timing when a predetermined period (6 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. This predetermined period is set to be the same as the period from the fluctuation start timing to the reach occurrence timing. The symbol position adjustment processing is always executed when the reach display occurs. Specifically, the process of creating such an internal command is incorporated in a variation pattern for performing reach display. That is, the position of the symbol “1” in the middle symbol row Z2 at the reach generation timing is the same regardless of the reach display. In other words, the display mode of the middle symbol array Z2 at the start timing (reach occurrence timing) of the low-speed fluctuation display of the middle symbol array Z2 is determined.

  The period from the start of the fluctuation to the reach occurrence timing is a fixed period regardless of the stop result. Further, in the low-speed fluctuation display, until a fluctuation end command is received (until the fluctuation display time elapses), at a constant speed (in this embodiment, the fluctuation display for one symbol in 0.5 seconds is performed). A variable display is performed. As a result, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is uniquely determined from the variable display time. For example, if the main controller 81 sets the variable display time to be 16 seconds, it takes 6 seconds before the reach generation timing, that is, the variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped, It takes 9.5 (= 0.5 × 19) seconds from the stop of the fluctuation display of the symbol array Z3 to the arrival of the symbol “1” of the intermediate symbol array Z2 again to the intermediate line L2, and thus a total of 15.5. Since it takes seconds, the remaining time is 0.5 seconds. Therefore, as shown in the middle symbol stop result information table of FIG. 31, the symbol of "1" is stopped at the position shifted left by one symbol from the middle line L2, that is, the left line L1.

  From the above, in the case of the reach display, the period from the fluctuation start timing to the low-speed fluctuation display start timing is set to be constant, and the mode of the middle symbol row Z2 at the start timing of the low-speed fluctuation display is uniquely determined. Since the fluctuation display speed of the low-speed fluctuation display is constant, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is determined according to the fluctuation display time. Then, the stop information is specified based on the game result and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. As a result, since the possible stop results are limited as compared with the case where the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is not specified, the amount of information stored in advance as the possible stop results can be reduced. .

  Here, as means for adjusting the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, means for changing the time from the fluctuation start timing to the reach occurrence timing, or changing the display mode of the middle symbol row Z2 at the reach occurrence timing can be considered. . However, in the former case, the fluctuation display pattern from the start of fluctuation to the reach generation timing is significantly different between the case where the reach occurs and the other cases. Then, at the timing before the reach occurrence timing, the player is made aware of the occurrence of the reach, and the willingness to play is reduced. On the other hand, in the latter case, since the display mode of the middle symbol column Z2 at the reach occurrence timing changes according to the stop result, the final stop result may be estimated from the display mode of the middle symbol column Z2 at the reach occurrence timing. There is. On the other hand, if the display mode of the middle symbol row Z2 at the reach generation timing is set to be random, fluctuations such as changing the fluctuation display speed in order to stop and display the stop result determined at the fluctuation end timing. A pattern adjustment process is required. Then, the information amount of the fluctuation pattern increases.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the display mode of the middle symbol row Z2 at the reach occurrence timing is the same regardless of the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. As a result, the final stop result is not predicted from the display mode of the middle symbol row Z2 in the reach generation timing. Further, since the time from the start of the fluctuation to the reach generation timing is constant, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 corresponding to the fluctuation display time is uniquely determined. Then, the stop result of the specified middle symbol row Z2 and the stop result according to the current game result are set. Accordingly, it is not necessary to execute the process of adjusting the position of the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 or the variable display speed so that the stop result related to the game times is obtained at the timing when the variable display time elapses. For example, in the case of a configuration in which a stop result of a plurality of middle symbol rows Z2 can be set from the same variable display time, it is necessary to set a variable display pattern corresponding to the stop result. Then, a plurality of fluctuation patterns (20 in the present embodiment) are set, and a problem such as an increase in the amount of information occurs. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the variation pattern is common regardless of the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. Therefore, the amount of information stored in advance is reduced.

  In this configuration, since the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is changed by changing the variable display time, diversity of the stop result is ensured.

  Next, super reach display will be described. The super reach display is the same as the normal reach display from the fluctuation start timing until the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the final stop symbol row at the reach generation timing, switches from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. Are different in the variable display mode. Specifically, the super reach display is changed from the low-speed fluctuation display to the high-speed fluctuation display (the first speed) at a predetermined timing during the low-speed fluctuation display (for example, a timing at which “7” symbol passes through the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2). Display or a third speed display faster than the second speed display), and then the internal command generation and output processing is executed so as to switch again from the high speed fluctuation display to the low speed fluctuation display. Then, during the high-speed fluctuation display after the occurrence of the reach, a symbol replacement process for replacing the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is executed so that the symbol corresponding to the stop result is finally stopped in the middle symbol row Z2. Thus, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 determined in the super reach stop result setting process is stopped in the middle symbol row Z2 without giving a sense of incongruity to the player within the fluctuation display time set by the main control device 81. Can be displayed. That is, the super reach display is a reach display in which the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 does not uniquely correspond to the variable display time.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 29), after executing the variation display pattern setting process in step S1904, the flag deletion process is executed in step S1905. The flag erasing process will be described later. In step S1906, after the high-speed fluctuation of all the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 is started, the fluctuation start processing ends. Note that various information stored in the register of the MPU 252 in step S1901 is deleted when the process for starting variation is ended.

  The during-variation process in step S1805 in the variation display control process (FIG. 28) is a process related to the suspension notice, and will be described later.

<Change end processing>
Next, the change termination processing in step S1806 in the change display control processing (FIG. 28) will be described. The change end process is a process executed when a change end command is received. Specifically, the change end time of the middle symbol sequence Z2, which is the final stop symbol sequence, that is, the variation display time elapse timing. This is the processing to be performed.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 36, in step S2201, output processing of a final stop display command is executed. As a result, the final stop display command is output to the VDP 255, and the symbol of the stop result in the current game round is finally displayed.

  Subsequent processing in steps S2202 and S2203 is processing related to the suspension notice. This will be described later.

<Regarding the variable display control process in the case of giving a preliminary notice>
Next, a description will be given of a variable display control process in the case of executing the suspension notice.

  First, as shown in FIG. 29, when the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in step S1902 of the change start process, the individual lottery process is executed in step S1907. In the individual lottery process, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the suspension notice in the variable display. Specifically, in the individual lottery process, a counter value (numerical information) for individual lottery is read from the lottery counter area 323 of the work RAM 254. Then, in the individual lottery process, the individual lottery table (preliminary lottery information group) stored in the individual lottery table storage area (preliminary lottery information group storage means) 317 of the program ROM 253 is read out. It is determined whether or not the individual lottery counter value corresponds to the individual winning. The probability of individual winning is arbitrary, but in the present pachinko machine 10, the individual lottery table is set so that the winning is achieved with a probability of 4/5.

  In subsequent step S1908, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S1907 is a winning. If not, the process proceeds to step S1903. If the lottery result is a win, the process advances to step S1909 to execute a stop result setting process corresponding to the suspension notice.

  In other words, the suspension notice is executed when the lottery in which the suspension notice is generated is won, and is executed when the individual lottery is further won. As a result, even if the number of games has been won in the hold lottery, the hold notice may not be executed. In other words, a jackpot result is expected even if the hold notice is not continuously executed in the game times before the game time related to the hold information that triggered the hold notice. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the reservation notice.

  The stop result setting process corresponding to the suspension notice will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the stop result setting process corresponding to the suspension notice, first, in step S2301, the notice design type information is read from the notice design type information storage area 326. In the following step S2302, it is determined from the information stored in the register of the MPU 252 whether or not a jackpot win or a missed reach occurs in the current game round. That is, it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the current game round.

  If it is determined that no reach occurs, a stop line determination process is performed in step S2303. That is, the numerical information stored in the line information update area 328 at that time is obtained.

  In a succeeding step S2304, a symbol combination determination process is executed. In this processing, the combination information table for complete loss in the combination information table storage area 314 is referred to, and the information of the combination of complete deviation symbols corresponding to the type information of the notice symbol grasped in step S2301 is specified. The complete-missing combination information table is a table in which information on the combination of completely-missing symbols is set according to the stop line information and the type information of the notice symbol. In this case, on the condition that the combination of the big hit symbol and the combination of the reach symbol are not stopped on all the activated lines, the symbol corresponding to the type information of the symbol for the notice is stopped in the display screen G in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In order to stop the display at the display position, the information of the completely off symbol combination is also specified by referring to the information of the stop line specified in step S2303. For example, when the type information of the symbol for the notice is “7” and the stop line is the left line L1, the combination of completely off symbols is “7” from the top, and “6” and “7” The information of the combination of completely off symbols is specified so as to be a sub symbol between "6" and "7". In this case, the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on the right line L3 in the middle symbol row Z2, and the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on the right line L3 in the lower symbol row Z3.

  Here, even if the conditions of the suspension notice are not satisfied, the stop result in the case of complete departure or detachment reach is the stop result as described above, that is, the same stoppage as the case of the suspension notice accidentally May result. That is, even in the game times that are not the game times related to the execution of the reservation notice, the suspension notice may be stopped. Thereby, diversification of a game can be aimed at.

  In a succeeding step S2305, the storage process of the address information of the stop information is executed. That is, the address information corresponding to the information of the stop line specified in step S2303 and the information of the combination of the completely deviated symbols specified in step S2304 is read out from the stop information table of the stop information table storage area 313, and the read-out is performed. The address information of the stop information is stored in the stop information address storage area 329.

  On the other hand, if the reach display occurs, the process advances to step S2306 to determine whether or not the current reach display type is the normal reach display. If the display is not the normal reach display, this means that the current reach display is the super reach display. In this case, the process advances to step S2307 to execute a super reach stop result setting process. In this process, the symbol corresponding to the notice symbol is used as a symbol constituting the combination of the super reach symbols, and the symbol corresponding to the notice symbol is finally stopped in the middle symbol column Z2 during the high-speed change display after the occurrence of the reach. In such a manner that the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are replaced. Thereby, without giving a sense of incongruity to the player within the fluctuation display time set by the main control device 81, it is possible to execute the suspension notice by the symbol corresponding to the symbol for the announcement, and the game times related to the reservation announcement and In addition, it is possible to associate the mode of the stop result with the game times related to the hold information set as a trigger of the execution of the hold notice.

  At the time of the reach occurrence, the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 is not switched from the high-speed change display to the low-speed change display, the high-speed change display is maintained, and the high-speed change display is changed to the low-speed change display at a predetermined timing after the reach occurs. Similarly, in the reach display that is switched to the display, by replacing the symbol during the high-speed change, the hold announcement with the symbol corresponding to the symbol for the announcement can be executed.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2306, the flow advances to step S2308 to execute a stop result grasp process for the middle symbol row Z2. In this process, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is grasped from the variable display time. Specifically, it refers to the middle symbol row stop result table. Thereby, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is grasped from the variable display time.

  Next, in step S2309, it is determined whether or not the game result is a big hit. If the game result is a big hit, it means that the game time is the game time that triggered the execution of the suspension notice. In this case, in step S2310, a stop line determination process is performed. In this process, the stop line is determined in correspondence with the same symbol position as the notice symbol specified to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2.

  In the process of determining the jackpot symbol in the subsequent step S2311, the same symbol as the notice symbol is selected as the jackpot symbol. Identify information.

  After that, in step S2313, the storage process of the address information of the stop information is executed. That is, the address information corresponding to the stop line information and the combination information of the big hit symbols is read from the stop information table of the stop information table storage area 313, and the read address information of the stop information is stored in the stop information address storage area 329. To be stored.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2309 that the game result is not a big hit, it means that the game result is a missed reach result. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2314, and a stop result setting process for off-normal reach corresponding to the suspension notice is executed.

<About the stop result setting process for off-normal reach corresponding to the suspension notice>
With reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38, a description will be given of the stop result setting process for off-normal reach corresponding to the suspension notice. In the stop result setting process for the off-normal reach corresponding to the on-hold notice, the stop result corresponding to the on-hold notice and the off-reach result can be set without changing the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. While the stop result is set, the stop result of the middle symbol column Z2 is not changed, and the stop result that corresponds to the holding notice by the symbol for the announcement and the out-of-reach result cannot be set. Without changing the stop result, a stop result that results in an off-reach result that does not correspond to the suspension notice is set.

  First, in step S2401, reach line determination processing is executed. This processing is the same as step S2101 of the off-normal reach stop result setting processing that does not correspond to the suspension notice in FIG.

  After that, in step S2402, a reach symbol determination process is executed. The process of determining the reach symbol is different from the case of not supporting the suspension notice. Specifically, the program ROM 253 is provided with a hold notice reach symbol determination table storage area 318, and refers to the hold notice reach symbol determination table stored in the hold notice reach symbol determination table storage area 318. . The reach symbol table for the hold announcement has a reach symbol set in one-to-one correspondence with the type of the symbol for the announcement. More specifically, the reach symbol determination table for hold notice is set so that the same symbol as the symbol for notice is selected as the reach symbol. By referring to the table, the reach symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the symbol for hold notice. As a result, when the same symbol as the notice symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, a stop result corresponding to the hold notice by the notice symbol is displayed. That is, the stop result of the middle symbol sequence Z2 is uniquely determined by the variable display time, and the suspension notice by the preview symbol is executed without executing the process of controlling the stop result of the middle symbol sequence Z2. In other words, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the suspension notice by the notice symbol can be executed. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

  For example, if the type information of the notice symbol is “7” and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is grasped from the variable display time when the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on the left line L1, FIG. As shown in FIG. 39 (a), the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the reach symbol combination with the reach symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2. Is done. Then, the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 of the upper symbol row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3. That is, a stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by the notice symbol is obtained. In other words, the hold notice using the notice symbol is executed. As a result, since the hold notice with the same symbol as the symbol stopped and displayed at the game time that triggered the hold notice will be executed, the game time that triggered the hold notice and the game time of the hold notice will be different. Closely related. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the change display patterns of the symbols in the successive game times as a series.

  On the other hand, if the same symbol as the symbol for the notice is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, the stop result does not correspond to the reserved notice. For example, if the type information of the notice symbol is “7” and the stop result of the middle symbol column Z2 is grasped from the variable display time when the symbol “5” is stopped and displayed on the left line L1, As shown in FIG. 39 (b), the symbol “5” is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the combination of the reach symbols whose reach symbol is “7” is stopped on the middle line L2, for example. The stop result may be set to be displayed. In this case, since the symbol “7” is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, there is no symbol that is commonly stopped and displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. That is, the stop result does not correspond to the suspension notice. Then, the stop information corresponding to the stop result is specified as it is.

  In the case as shown in FIG. 39 (b), that is, when the same symbol as the notice symbol is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, the stop result of the middle symbol column Z2 is executed in order to execute the suspension notice by the preview symbol. Need to change. However, even when it is necessary to change the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 when executing the suspension notice by the preview symbol, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is not changed. Then, without changing the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, a stop result that does not correspond to the suspension notice is selected. In other words, if the change of the variable display time is required to execute the hold notice using the design for notice, the hold notice is not executed. Thereby, the change of the variable display time due to the suspension notice is suppressed.

  In the case where the suspension notice is performed, if the configuration is such that the variable display time longer than usual or the configuration is such that the variation display time shorter than usual is selected, each game time is consumed in the situation where the suspension notice is performed. Takes longer or shorter. Then, depending on how to adjust the angle and the direction of the nail provided in the game area, the winning holes in the operating ports 33 and 34 are relatively easily generated, and the winning in the operating ports 33 and 34 are achieved. There is a possibility that the difference in the digestion rate of the game times per unit time may occur between the game hall and the game hall where the game is relatively unlikely to occur. In other words, in the former game hall, there is a high possibility that a plurality of hold information has already been stored at the timing when the hold information that triggers the execution of the hold notice is stored, whereas in the latter game hall, the possibility is high. Low. In this case, if the variable display time longer than usual is selected, the digestion rate of the game times per unit time in the former game hall is lower than that in the latter game hall, and the variable display time shorter than usual is selected. If so, the digestion rate of the number of games per unit time in the former game hall will be higher than that in the latter game hall. On the other hand, when the fluctuation display time is affected, by restricting the execution of the suspension notice, the suspension notice is performed without affecting the digestion rate of the game times per unit time. The effect can be obtained.

  As described above, the suspension notice can be suitably executed without changing the variable display time. Thereby, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

  In addition, since the individual lottery process of whether or not to execute the hold notice is performed for each game, the hold notice may not be performed even when the hold notice condition is satisfied. That is, the suspension notice may not be continuously performed. Thereby, even if the execution of the suspension notice is restricted, the player does not feel uncomfortable. If there is no individual lottery process, if there are a plurality of previous game times related to the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice, the hold notice is executed in all the game times. In this case, if the execution of the suspension notice is restricted, the player will feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, since the individual lottery process is provided, when there are a plurality of previous game times related to the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice, it is a usual case that the hold notice is not continuously executed. It is in. Thereby, even if the execution of the reservation notice is restricted, the player does not have a special impression.

  Thereafter, in steps S2403 to S2405, it is determined whether or not the combination of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines based on the stop result, the reach symbol, and the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2 at this time. At the same time, when the display is stopped, the reach line changing process is executed. These processes are the same as the processes in steps S2103 to S2105 of the off-normal reach stop result setting process that does not correspond to the suspension notice.

  Here, with the configuration in which the reach line is changed, the suspension notice using the design for notice is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (a), it is specified that the combination of the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 from the reach symbol and the reach line, as a result of stopping the middle symbol row Z2. In this case, the reach line is changed to the middle line L2. As a result, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), it is possible to prevent the combination of the big hit symbols from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, and to hold the symbol “7”, which is the reach symbol (that is, the symbol for the notice). The notice has been suspended. If the reach symbol is changed, it is impossible to stop and display the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by the notice symbol. Therefore, it is possible to execute the suspension announcement using the announcement symbol while preventing the combination of the big hit symbols from being stopped and displayed on the activated line.

  Next, in the processing of steps S2406 to S2408, processing for restricting symbols other than the notice symbol from being the stop result corresponding to the reserved notice is executed. First, in step S2506, a suspension notice stop line change table stored in the stop line change table storage area 315 is referred to. The suspension notice stop line change table is a table relating to a reach display in which a combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed on the two activated lines L4 and L5, a so-called double reach display.

  In detail, as shown in FIG. 41, the suspension notice stop line change table stores a combination of a big hit symbol on any of the activated lines based on the stop line, the type of the reach symbol, and the stop result of the middle symbol column Z2. Is not stopped and a pattern in which a symbol other than the symbol for notice is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines is specified in advance.

  For example, it is specified that the stop line is the upward line L5, the type information of the symbol for the notice is "1", and the symbol "1" stops on the left line L1 of the middle symbol column Z2 from the variable display time. In this case, as shown in FIG. 42 (a-1), the symbol “1” stops at the right line L3 of the upper symbol column Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol column Z2, and the left line L1 of the lower symbol column Z3. At the same time, the symbol "2" is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol column Z1, the right line L3 of the middle symbol column Z2, and the right line L3 of the lower symbol column Z3. Then, the symbol “2”, which is a symbol other than the symbol for the notice, is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In other words, the stop result is the same as in the case of the suspension notice using the symbol “2”, which is a symbol other than the symbol for the announcement. On the other hand, in such a case, the stop line is changed to the middle line L2. Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (a-2), the combination of the big hit symbols is not stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines, and the symbol "1" is stopped and displayed on each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Become. As a result, while the stop result corresponding to the reservation notice by the same symbol as the notice design is obtained, the stop result of the other symbols is the same as that in the case of the reservation notice. In other words, execution of the suspension notice by another symbol is restricted. Therefore, the game times of the reservation notice and the game times of the jackpot are closely related.

  Further, for example, when the stop line is the upward line L5, the type information of the notice symbol is “1”, and the symbol “2” stops at the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2 from the variable display time. When specified, as shown in FIG. 42 (b-1), the symbol “2” is displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol column Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol column Z2, and the right line L3 of the lower symbol column Z3. Stopped and displayed. Then, the symbol “2”, which is a symbol other than the symbol for the notice, is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. That is, the same stop result as in the case of the suspension notice using the symbol “2” is obtained. On the other hand, in such a case, the stop line is changed to the left line L1. Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (b-2), there is no symbol that is stopped and displayed in common in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. That is, the stop result is a stop result that does not correspond to the suspension notice. In other words, execution of the suspension notice is restricted.

  In the reach display of the left line L1, the middle line L2, and the right line L3, the symbols stopped and displayed in common in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are only reach symbols as shown in FIG. 39 and the like. It is. Therefore, regardless of the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the symbols that can be stopped and displayed in common in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are only reach symbols of the same symbol as the symbol for the announcement, so that the reserved announcement by another symbol is performed. Is not executed. That is, in the reach display, by making the reach symbol the same as the symbol for the announcement, the execution of the hold announcement by other symbols is restricted, with the exception of double reach display.

  In addition, although the jackpot stop line change table and the suspension notice stop line change table are provided respectively, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be stored as one table. In such a case, since the change processing is completed by one table reference processing, the processing load can be reduced.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the reach display for executing the hold notice may be configured to uniquely limit the execution of the double reach display. That is, in the process of determining the stop line, the configuration may be such that the right-downline L4 and the right-upline L5 are removed in advance. However, from the viewpoint of diversity of reach display, the present embodiment is superior. That is, when a symbol different from the reach symbols of both the downward-sloping line L4 and the upward-sloping line L5 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, it is not necessary to change the reach line. It is not necessary to limit to such a stop result.

  In step S2409, a process of determining a combination of symbols is executed, and in step S2410, a process of storing address information of stop information is executed. These processes are the same as those in steps S2106 and S2107 in FIG.

  Returning to the description of the stop result setting process (FIG. 37) corresponding to the suspension notice, the process proceeds to step S2315 after executing the process of step S2305, step S2313, or step S2314. In step S2315, the notice execution flag (notice execution information) is stored in the notice execution flag storage area (notice execution information storage means) in the various flag storage area 334 of the work RAM 254. The notice execution flag is information for specifying, by the MPU 252, a situation in which the holding notice is being executed in the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the main stop result setting process ends.

  Returning to the description of the variation start processing (FIG. 29), in step S1904, a variation display pattern setting process is executed. This processing is as described above. Thereafter, the flow proceeds to the flag erasing process in step S1905.

  Here, the flag erasing process in step S1905 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the flag erasing process, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the jackpot suspension flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the jackpot hold flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2505 without executing the processing of steps S2502 to S2504. If the jackpot hold flag is stored, the information in the erasure counter area 322 is updated in step S2502 so that the value stored in the erasure counter area 322 is decremented by one.

  Thereafter, in step S2503, it is determined whether the value of the erasing counter area 322 is “0”. If it is “0”, the jackpot hold flag is deleted in step S2504, and the process proceeds to step S2505. If it is not “0”, step S2505 is performed without executing the process of step S2504. Proceed to.

  As described above, the jackpot hold flag is a flag that is stored when the hold information stored in the main control device 81 includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning, and is deleted. In the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the counter area 322, information for specifying the order in which the hold information is to be started in the game round is stored. Furthermore, in the hold command corresponding processing (FIG. 25), the processing of step S1502 is executed at a timing before the processing of step S1503 is executed, so that the hold information stored in the main control device 81 is stored. In the case where a plurality of pieces of hold information corresponding to the jackpot win are included, information on the order of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win whose start target is later is stored in the erasing counter area 322. It becomes. Therefore, the case where the information in the erasing counter area 322 becomes “0” as the initial value means that the hold information stored in the main control device 81 includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning. Means that there is no jackpot, and in this case, the jackpot hold flag is cleared.

  In the flag erasing process, in a step S2505, it is determined whether or not a notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the advance notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, the flag erasure processing is terminated as it is. If the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, in step S2506, the information in the hold notice counter area 327 is updated so that the value stored in the hold notice counter area 327 is decremented by one. I do.

  Thereafter, in step S2507, it is determined whether the value of the hold notice counter area 327 is "0". If "0", the flag elimination process is terminated after erasing the notice condition satisfaction flag in step S2508, and if it is not "0", the process in step S2508 is executed. This flag erasure processing ends without any processing.

  As described above, the notice condition satisfaction flag is a flag that is stored when the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied, and the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied in the hold notice counter area 327. In this case, information for specifying the order in which the hold information, which has caused the satisfaction of the condition, is the start target of the game round is stored. Therefore, when the information of the hold notice counter area 327 becomes “0” as the initial value, the hold information that has caused the establishment of the condition for executing the hold notice has already been the target of the game round. In this case, the notice condition satisfaction flag is deleted.

<Process during fluctuation>
Next, the during-variation process of step S1805 in the variation display control process (FIG. 28) will be described. The processing during the change is a new prize to the operating ports 33 and 34 in the middle of the game time that is not the game time for which the suspension notice is being executed and is not the game time related to the hold information that caused the execution of the suspension notice. Is generated, and when the execution condition of the suspension notice is satisfied for the suspension information acquired based on the winning, the suspension notice is executed in the current game time.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 44, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the current game time is a game time in which a jackpot or a reach has occurred. In the case of a gaming cycle in which a jackpot or a reach has occurred, the in-fluctuation processing ends.
If it is not a game cycle in which a jackpot or a reach has occurred, in step S2602, the notice execution flag is not stored in the work RAM 254, although the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the work RAM 254. It is determined whether or not. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the notice execution flag is stored by executing the change start process (FIG. 29) in the situation where the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored. Therefore, the situation where the notice execution flag is stored but the notice execution flag is not stored means that the change display of the symbol in one game is started after the change start process is executed. Later, a new prize is generated in the operating ports 33 and 34, which means that the conditions for executing the suspension notice for the suspension information acquired based on the prize are satisfied.

  If it is not a situation where the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored and the notice execution flag is not stored, the process during the fluctuation is ended as it is, the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, and the notice execution flag is stored. If not, in step S2603, the type information of the notice symbol is read from the notice symbol type information storage area 326. In the following step S2604, it is determined whether or not all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the symbol display is performed by the symbol display device 41, as shown in FIGS. 46A to 46C, first, the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the upper symbol row Z2. High-speed fluctuation display (or first speed display) is performed so that identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in all symbol columns of the lower symbol column Z3 is impossible or difficult in appearance. Thereafter, when the period of T1 elapses from the start of the change, first, regarding the upper symbol row Z1, the identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the upper symbol row Z1 becomes easy in appearance. The display is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display (or the second speed display slower than the first speed display), and when the period of T2 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped. Further, when the period of T2 has elapsed from the start of the change in this manner, it is determined that, for the lower symbol row Z3, each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the lower symbol row Z3 is easily identified in appearance. Thus, the display is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and when the period of T3 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped. Also, when the period of T3 has elapsed from the start of the change in this manner, in the middle symbol row Z2, it is determined that each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the middle symbol row Z2 is easily identified in appearance. The display is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. Then, when the period of T4 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped.

  In the above configuration, the periods of T1, T2, T3, and T4 are more detailed in accordance with each variable display pattern stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 316 except for the case where a predetermined reach display is performed. Are defined in a one-to-one correspondence with the respective variable display patterns. The reach effect is performed after the time period T3 elapses and until the time period T4 elapses.

  It is not essential that the timing at which the variable display of the symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and the timing at which the variable display speed of the symbol in the lower symbol row Z3 is switched at the same time. Good. Similarly, it is not essential that the timing at which the variation display of the symbol in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and the timing at which the variation display speed of the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is switched at the same time. May be. Further, the T1, T2, and T3 are made to correspond one-to-one with the number of the hold information stored at the start of the game round, more specifically, according to the number of the hold information stored at the start of the game round. May be determined. If the number of pieces of hold information stored at the start of the game round is the maximum number of holds, one of T1, T2, and T3 may be set to “0”.

  The MPU 252 measures the time from the start of the symbol change display on the symbol display device 41 by using the elapsed time counter area 332 provided as the elapsed time measuring means (or the elapsed time measuring means) provided in the work RAM 254. Specifically, when the fluctuation display is started, the addition processing of the elapsed time counter area 332 is performed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). In the elapsed time table of the elapsed time table storage area 319 provided in the program ROM 253, information of each counter value corresponding to the above T1, T2, T3 contains information of a variable display pattern that can be set at the start of the game round. Are stored in a state where they are associated one by one. Then, in step S2205, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current elapsed time counter area 332 is less than the counter value corresponding to the above T1 in the elapsed time table storage area 319. It is determined whether or not the columns Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed.

  If it is determined in step S2604 that all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed, the first-stage correction table as the first-stage correction information group is referred to in step S2605. The first-stage correction table is stored in a correction table storage area 320 as correction information group storage means provided in the program ROM 253. As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the first-stage correction table is an arbitrary table of the information of the initial variable display pattern and the type information of the notice symbol excluding the case where the jackpot result is obtained and the case where the reach display is generated. The information of the variable display pattern for the first correction is set in one-to-one correspondence with the combination of the combinations, and the address information is further set in correspondence with the information of the variable display pattern for the first correction. I have. In this case, all pieces of information on the first modified display pattern are set as information on the display pattern after a lapse of T1 from the start of the change. However, the information of each first correction variable display pattern is set so as not to change the variable display time in the initially set variable display pattern.

  In subsequent step S2606, first correction address information (first correction information) corresponding to a combination of the type information of the notice symbol specified in step S2603 and the information stored in the storage area 331 of the pattern information address. ) Is specified from the first-stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 333 provided in the work RAM 254.

  Since the first correction address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 333, the MPU 252 determines, based on the information of the elapsed time counter area 332, that the period of T1 has elapsed since the start of the change. Then, an internal command is generated and output to the VDP 255 so that the symbol variation corresponding to the information of the first correction variation display pattern set this time is displayed. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, all the symbols corresponding to the type information of the symbol for the notice are provided on condition that the combination of the jackpot symbols and the combination of the reach symbols are not stopped on all the activated lines. In the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the stop is displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G.

  In addition, the information of the variable display pattern for the first correction stored in the first stage correction table includes not only the content of the variable display of the symbol, but also the information of the background image displayed together with the variable display of the symbol and the like. The information of the image of the reach effect when the reach effect is performed is also included. Therefore, by outputting the internal command corresponding to the set first variation display pattern to the VDP 255, the background image is displayed together with the variation display of the symbols, and various effects such as reach effects are performed. If it is, the effect image is displayed. This is the same for the information of the variable display pattern for the second correction and the information of the variable display pattern for the third correction, which will be described later.

  Then, after the notice execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S2607, the in-change processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S2604 that all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not changing at high speed, it is determined in step S2608 whether or not the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current value stored in the elapsed time counter area 332 is less than the counter value corresponding to T2 in the elapsed time table storage area 319.

  When it is determined that the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed, in step S2609, based on the information stored in the storage area 329 of the stop information address, the type information of the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 is changed. Figure out. In this case, as the type information of the stopped symbol, there are a case where the main symbol is one and a case where the main symbol is two. Both of them are specified as symbols to be determined.

  In a succeeding step S2610, it is determined whether or not the correction condition is satisfied for the symbol to be determined identified in the step S2609. The correction condition is set so that if the type information of the notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, an odd-numbered symbol, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied regardless of the symbol to be determined. If the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, an even-numbered symbol, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied only when the symbol to be determined is the non-specific symbol. Is set to

  By setting the correction condition as described above, a jackpot result or a reach display is generated by the non-specific symbol in the game times related to the hold information that has caused the establishment of the condition for executing the hold notice. In spite of this, it is prevented that the reserved notice is executed by the specific symbol in the game time related to the reserved notice before the game time. When the hold notice is executed by the specific symbol, the player is expected to expect the occurrence of the probable change jackpot result in which the combination of the same specific symbol eventually stops on the activated line. In the event that a combination of reach symbols or a combination of jackpot symbols is finally displayed by a non-specific symbol, it is feared that the above-mentioned expectation is impaired and the willingness to continue the game is reduced, but this pachinko machine According to the configuration of FIG. 10, this can be prevented. On the other hand, when a combination of reach symbols and a combination of big hit symbols are finally displayed by the specific symbol, even if the non-specific symbol is executed by the non-specific symbol in the game time related to the previous preliminary announcement, However, it can be considered that the player has finally been promoted from the non-specific symbol to the specific symbol, and it is considered that the willingness to continue the game as described above does not decrease.

  If the type information of the notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, an odd-numbered symbol, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied only when the symbol to be determined is the specific symbol. In addition, if the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, an even-numbered symbol, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied only when the symbol to be determined is the non-specific symbol. May be set. In this case, if a jackpot result occurs due to a non-specific symbol or a reach display occurs in the game time related to the hold information that has caused the condition to execute the hold notice, the hold notice is given by the non-specific symbol. When a jackpot result is generated by a specific symbol or a reach display is generated in a game related to the hold information that has caused the establishment of a condition for executing the hold announcement, the hold announcement is performed by the specific symbol. It will be.

  If it is determined in step S2610 that the correction condition has not been satisfied, the in-fluctuation processing is ended as it is, and if it is determined that the correction condition has been satisfied, the flow proceeds to step S2611.

  In step S2611, the second stage correction table as a second stage correction information group stored in the correction table storage area 320 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 45 (b), the second-stage correction table includes information on the initial variable display pattern and the type information of the symbol to be determined, excluding the case where the jackpot result is obtained and the case where the reach display is generated. The information of the variable display pattern for the second correction is set in one-to-one correspondence with an arbitrary combination, and the address information is further set in association with the information of the variable display pattern for the second correction. ing. In this case, all the information of the variable display pattern for the second correction is set as the information of the variable display pattern after the lapse of the period T2 from the start of the change. However, the information of each variable display pattern for the second correction is set so as not to change the variable display time in the variable display pattern that is initially set.

  In the following step S2612, the second correction for the second correction corresponding to the combination of the type information of the symbol to be determined for which the correction condition is determined to be satisfied in step S2610 and the information stored in the pattern information address storage area 331. Is specified from the second-stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 333.

  In addition, when the correction condition is satisfied for any of the two symbols as the determination target, the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol is determined as the determination target for which the correction condition is satisfied. It is constituted so that it may be a design of. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a design on the side corresponding to the non-specific design may be configured as a design to be determined that the correction condition is satisfied. Further, the symbol on the smaller side or the symbol on the larger side may be configured to be the symbol to be determined that the correction condition is satisfied.

  Since the second correction address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 333, the MPU 252 determines that the period of T2 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation based on the information of the elapsed time counter area 332, An internal command is generated and output to the VDP 255 so that a symbol corresponding to the information of the second correction variable display pattern set this time is displayed. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied, provided that the combination of the jackpot symbol and the reach symbol is not stopped on all the activated lines. The target symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  After that, the notice execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S2613, and then the current change processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S2608 that the lower symbol row Z3 is not changing at high speed, it is determined in step S2614 whether the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current value stored in the elapsed time counter area 332 is less than the counter value corresponding to T3 in the elapsed time table storage area 319.

  If it is determined that the middle symbol row Z2 is not changing at high speed, the change-in-use process is terminated. When it is determined that the middle symbol row Z2 is fluctuating at high speed, in step S2615, based on the information stored in the storage area 329 of the stop information address, the type information of the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 and , The type information of the lower symbol row Z3. In this case, there are one main symbol and two main symbols as stop symbol type information of the upper symbol column Z1. In the case of one symbol, it is determined as the symbol to be determined in the upper symbol column Z1. In the case of two symbols, both symbols are identified as symbols to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1. In addition, as the type information of the stopped symbol of the lower symbol column Z3, there are one main symbol and two main symbols, but in the case of one main symbol, it is specified as the symbol to be determined in the lower symbol column Z3. In the case of two symbols, both are specified as symbols to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3.

  In a succeeding step S2616, it is determined whether or not the correction condition is satisfied for the symbol to be determined identified in the step S2615. If the common symbol of the same type does not exist in the symbol to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbol to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied. Is set not to be. Also, even if a common symbol of the same type exists, if the type information of the notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, an odd-numbered symbol, any of the common symbols of the same type is used. Even if there is a correction condition, it is set so as to be determined to be satisfied, and if the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, an even-numbered symbol, It is set so that it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied only when the symbol is a non-specific symbol.

  By determining that the correction condition is satisfied when a common symbol of the same type exists, it is possible to perform the suspension notice in the mode described above. Further, by determining whether or not the correction condition is satisfied in relation to the type information of the notice symbol as described above, the same operation and effect as the operation and effect described in step S2610 can be obtained. Note that the correction condition relating to the relationship with the type information of the notice symbol may be the same as the different pattern described in step S2610.

  If it is determined in step S2616 that the correction condition is not satisfied, the in-change processing is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied, the flow proceeds to step S2617.

  In step S2617, a third-stage correction table as a third-stage correction information group stored in the correction table storage area 320 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 45 (c), the third-stage correction table stores the information of the initial variable display pattern and the type information of the symbol to be determined excluding the case where a jackpot result or a reach display occurs. The information of the variable display pattern for the third correction is set in one-to-one correspondence with an arbitrary combination, and the address information is further set in correspondence with the information of the variable display pattern for the third correction. ing. In this case, all the information on the variable display pattern for the third correction is set as information on the variable display pattern after the lapse of the period T3 from the start of the change. However, the information of each variable display pattern for the third correction is set so as not to change the variable display time in the variable display pattern set initially.

  In a succeeding step S2618, the third correction for the third correction corresponding to the combination of the type information of the symbol to be determined that the correction condition is satisfied in the step S2616 and the information stored in the storage area 331 of the pattern information address. (Third correction information) is specified from the third-stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 333.

  Since the third correction address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 333, the MPU 252 determines, based on the information in the elapsed time counter area 332, that the period of T3 has elapsed since the start of the change. An internal command is generated and output to the VDP 255 so that the symbol corresponding to the information of the third correction variable display pattern set this time is displayed. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied, provided that the combination of the jackpot symbol and the reach symbol is not stopped on all the activated lines. The target symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  After that, the notice execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S2619, and then the current change processing ends.

  It should be noted that it is not essential for the processing during fluctuation to have a configuration in which the fluctuation display pattern for the hold notice is not modified in both the game time in which the jackpot occurs and the game time in which the reach occurs, for example, a game in which the jackpot occurs The change display pattern for the hold notice may not be modified in the round, but the change display pattern for the hold notice may be modified in the game in which the reach occurs. In addition, by executing the processing of step S2610 and step S2616, the type of the stop symbol of the symbol row for which the high-speed fluctuation display has already been completed is compared with the type of the symbol for the notice, and the symbol for the notice becomes the normal jackpot result. If the corresponding non-specific symbol and the stop symbol is a specific symbol corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result, the variable display pattern is configured not to be modified, but the present invention is not limited to this, Even if it is a non-specific symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot result and the stop symbol is a specific symbol corresponding to the probable variable jackpot result, the variable display pattern may be modified.

<Situation when the floating display pattern is modified and the suspension notice is executed>
Here, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 46, a state in which the variable display pattern is corrected and the suspension notice is executed will be described.

  FIG. 46A shows a case where the execution condition of the suspension notice is satisfied when all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed. In this case, the execution condition of the suspension notice is established from the timing of t1 which is the timing of the start of the fluctuation to the timing of t2 when the period of T1 elapses. In such a situation, from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2, the symbol variation display is performed based on the initial variation display pattern, and after the timing of t2, the symbol variation display is performed based on the variation display pattern for correction.

  FIG. 46B shows a case where the execution condition of the hold notice is satisfied when the high-speed fluctuation is not performed in the upper symbol row Z1 but the high-speed fluctuation is performed in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3. Is shown. In this case, the execution condition of the suspension notice is satisfied from the timing t2 when the period T1 elapses to the timing t3 when the period T2 elapses. In such a situation, the symbol variation display is performed based on the initial variation display pattern from the timing t1 to the timing t3, and after the timing t3, the symbol variation display is performed based on the variation display pattern for correction.

  FIG. 46C shows a case where the execution condition of the hold notice is satisfied when the high-speed fluctuation is not performed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, but the high-speed fluctuation is performed in the middle symbol row Z2. Is shown. In this case, the execution condition of the suspension notice is satisfied from the timing t3 when the period T2 elapses to the timing t4 when the period T3 elapses. In such a situation, from the timing of t1 to the timing of t4, the symbol variation display is performed based on the initial variation display pattern, and after the timing of t4, the symbol variation display is performed based on the correction variation display pattern.

  Note that FIGS. 46A to 46C illustrate the case where the initial fluctuation display patterns are all the same, but in any of FIGS. 46A to 46C, the fluctuation starts (at the timing of t1). ) To the end of fluctuation (timing of t5), T4 is the same.

<Change end processing>
Next, the change termination processing in step S1806 in the change display control processing (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in step S2201, a final stop display command output process is executed. As a result, the final stop display command is output to the VDP 255, and the symbol of the stop result in the current game round is finally displayed.

  In a succeeding step S2202, it is determined whether or not a notice execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the notice execution flag is not stored, the process for ending the change is ended as it is. If the notice execution flag is stored, the notice execution flag is deleted in step S2203, and then the change ending is executed. The process ends.

<Specific form of suspension notice>
Next, a specific mode of the suspension notice including the case where the reach display occurs will be described. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific mode of the suspension notice. FIG. 47 shows a case where a jackpot result occurs in the game times related to the hold information that has caused the establishment of the condition for executing the hold notice, and the game times related to the hold notice up to the last game time are not shown. It shows the case of two times. The big hit symbol shows the case of (a) and (c) as a specific symbol “7” and the case of (b) as a non-specific symbol of “6”.

  FIG. 47 (a) shows a case where the variable display pattern for the suspension notice is set in all the game times related to the suspension notice. In this case, although the symbol stop result in the first game round shown in FIG. 47 (a-1) indicates that the combination of the jackpot symbol and the reach symbol is not stopped on all the activated lines, The symbol “7”, which is the symbol, is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  In FIG. 47 (a-2), a normal reach display is generated. As a result of the stop of the symbols in such a game round, the combination of the reach symbols consisting of the symbol of “7”, which is the notice symbol of the current suspension notice, is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, and the left line of the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. The symbol "7" is stopped and displayed on L1. The stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is determined from the variable display time. As a result, in the normal reach display, the suspension notice corresponding to the design for notice is executed.

  Thereafter, in the final game round shown in FIG. 47 (a-3), the normal reach display is executed. Specifically, the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 of each of the symbol rows Z1 and Z3 except for the middle symbol row Z2, and at the same time, the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is once a high-speed fluctuation display. Is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display. Thereafter, the low-speed fluctuation display is maintained until the fluctuation display time elapses, the fluctuation display ends at the elapse timing of the fluctuation display time, and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 corresponding to the fluctuation display time is stopped and displayed. In this case, the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. This is because the type of the notice symbol is determined to be “7” based on the fact that “7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 from the variable display time. As a result, the combination of the big hit symbols with the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on the one activated line. That is, in the pattern shown in FIG. 47 (a), the notice symbol is unified to the symbol of "7" in all the game times related to the reservation notice.

  FIG. 47B shows a case where a reach display is generated in each of the game times related to the suspension notice. More specifically, FIGS. 47 (b-1) and 47 (b-2) show a case where normal reach display is performed, and FIG. 47 (b-3) shows a case where super reach display is performed.

  In this case, the symbol stop result in the first game round shown in FIG. 47 (b-1) is that the combination of the reach symbols consisting of the symbol of “6”, which is the symbol for the preliminary announcement of the current suspension notice, is displayed on the left line L1. At the same time, the symbol “6” is stopped on the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2. As a result, in the normal reach display, the suspension notice using the design for notice is executed.

  On the other hand, the stop result of the symbol in the game round shown in FIG. 47 (b-2) is stopped on the right line L3 as a reach symbol including the symbol of "6" which is the symbol for the preliminary announcement of the current suspension notice. The symbol "7" is stopped on the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2. The stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is determined from the variable display time. In this case, the symbol “6” is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. In other words, when the symbol corresponding to the symbol for notice is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, the stop result does not correspond to the suspension notice. That is, the execution of the reservation notice is restricted.

  Thereafter, in the last game round shown in FIG. 47 (b-3), the super reach display is executed. Specifically, the symbol “6” is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 of each of the symbol rows Z1 and Z3 except for the middle symbol row Z2, and at the same time, the variation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is once a high-speed variation display. Is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display. After that, the display is switched to the high-speed change display again, and a symbol replacement process is executed so that the symbol “6” is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 during the high-speed change display. As a result, in the super reach display, the combination of the big hit symbols with the symbol “6” is stopped and displayed on the one activated line without changing the variable display time. That is, the jackpot result may be stopped and displayed in the super reach display in which the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 does not depend on the variable display time.

  In the pattern shown in FIG. 47 (b), under the situation where the normal reach display occurs in the game times related to the reservation notice, the pattern for the notice, more specifically, the execution of the reservation notice is displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. When the same symbol as the symbol stopped and displayed in the game time is stopped and displayed, the stop result corresponds to the suspension notice by the symbol for notice. On the other hand, when the symbol for notice is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, the stop result does not correspond to the reserved notice. In other words, when displaying the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice, if it is not necessary to change the suspension result (variable display time) of the middle symbol row Z2, the suspension notice is executed while the variation display time is changed. If it is necessary to do so, do not issue the suspension notice.

  FIG. 47 (c) shows a case where, in the first game time of each game time related to the reservation notice, a variable display pattern for the reservation notice is set in the middle of the game time. In this case, although the symbol stop result in the first game round shown in FIG. 47 (c-1) indicates that the combination of the jackpot symbol and the reach symbol is not stopped on all the activated lines, The symbol "6" corresponding to the stop symbol in the symbol column Z1 or the symbol in the lower symbol column Z3 is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  In addition, as for the stop result of the symbol in the next game round shown in FIG. 47 (c-2), the combination of the jackpot symbol and the combination of the reach symbol are not stopped on all the activated lines, but the symbol for the preliminary notice of the current reservation notice is provided. Is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Thereafter, in the final game round shown in FIG. 47 (c-3), the super reach display is executed, and the combination of the big hit symbols with the symbol of “7” is stopped and displayed on the one activated line. That is, in the pattern shown in FIG. 47 (c), it is possible to make the player expect that the stop result has been promoted from the non-specific symbol to the specific symbol in the first game round and the next game round according to the suspension notice.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  A reservation notice according to the reservation information that is stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation ball storage area 232 and that is not a target of the determination of success / failure is executed in a game time earlier than the game time related to the hold information. Sometimes. Thereby, for the player, a game in which a winning of a game ball to the operating port 33, 34 is generated, and a result of determination as to whether or not the holding information acquired based on the winning is valid in a game round related to the holding information. Not only that, when a plurality of pieces of hold information are stored in the hold area RE, the result of the case where the order of the hit / fail determination is determined for the hold information is the content of the hold notice. Is added in order to predict according to the game, thereby diversifying the game. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  The suspension notice is made according to the display mode on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Thereby, if the player is paying attention to the display screen G in order to grasp the result of the determination of success / failure of each game time, he / she can naturally check the suspension notice. Is prevented from being overlooked. In addition, since the suspension notice is performed based on the variation display pattern of the symbol of each game on the display screen G, the effect of preventing the suspension notice from being overlooked is enhanced. In particular, by performing the suspension notice according to the mode of the stop result in the fluctuation display of the symbol of each game, the timing at which the suspension notice is performed becomes clear for the player, and the possibility of missing the suspension notice is further reduced. You.

  In the configuration in which the suspension notice is performed according to the mode of the suspension result as described above, when the suspension result corresponding to the suspension notice is displayed, if it is necessary to change the variable display time, the execution of the suspension notice is performed. Restricted. As a result, the fluctuation of the fluctuation display time accompanying the execution of the suspension notice is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time required to complete each game time from fluctuating in accordance with the contents of the hold information set to trigger the execution of the hold notice.

  For example, when a suspension notice is performed, if a configuration in which a variable display time longer than usual is selected or a configuration in which a variation display time shorter than usual is selected is used, in the situation where the suspension notice is performed, each game time is consumed. Takes longer or shorter. Then, depending on how to adjust the angle and the direction of the nail provided in the game area, the winning holes in the operating ports 33 and 34 are relatively easily generated, and the winning in the operating ports 33 and 34 are achieved. There is a possibility that the difference in the digestion rate of the game times per unit time may occur between the game hall and the game hall where the game is relatively unlikely to occur. In other words, in the former game hall, there is a high possibility that a plurality of hold information has already been stored at the timing when the hold information that triggers the execution of the hold notice is stored, whereas in the latter game hall, the possibility is high. Low. In this case, if the variable display time longer than usual is selected, the digestion rate of the game times per unit time in the former game hall is lower than that in the latter game hall, and the variable display time shorter than usual is selected. If so, the digestion rate of the number of games per unit time in the former game hall will be higher than that in the latter game hall. On the other hand, when the fluctuation display time is affected, by restricting the execution of the suspension notice, the suspension notice is performed without affecting the digestion rate of the game times per unit time. The effect can be obtained.

  In the case of performing the suspension notice, on the condition that the combination of the big hit symbols is not stopped and displayed on one activated line, the symbols constituting the combination of the big hit symbols are stopped and displayed in the respective symbol columns Z1 to Z3. did. As a result, it is possible to make the form of the stop result for the hold notice similar to the form of the stop result in the game round that results in the jackpot, and when the stop result for the hold notice is displayed, it corresponds to the hold notice. Makes it easier for the player to understand.

  When the symbol change display is performed in the symbol display device 41, the change display is stopped after the high-speed change display is switched to the low-speed change display in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In the middle symbol row Z2 of the reach display, the time from the change start timing to the change timing of the change display is constant, and the form at the change timing is a predetermined form. Thereby, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 fluctuates according to the fluctuation display time. In this case, if the suspension notice corresponding to the content of the suspension information that has triggered the execution of the suspension notice cannot be executed without changing the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 that is the final stop symbol row, Execution of the suspension notice was restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the variable display time accompanying the execution of the suspension notice.

  An individual lottery process for executing or not executing the hold notice is performed for each game, and when the lottery process is won, the hold notice is executed in the game. That is, in the game times before the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice, the hold notice may not be executed even if the hold notice condition is satisfied. Thereby, even if the execution of the hold notice is restricted in the reach display, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  The type of the symbol for the reservation notice is made to correspond to the type of the symbol constituting the combination of the big hit symbols or the combination of the reach symbols in the game times related to the reservation information set as the trigger of the execution of the reservation notice. Was. As a result, it is possible to correlate the mode of the stop result between the game times for which the suspension notice is performed and the game times related to the suspension information set as the trigger of the execution of the suspension notice, and the fluctuation display of the symbols in these successive game times The pattern can be provided to the player as a series.

  In the reach display of the game times related to the hold notice, the reach symbol was set as the notice symbol. Thereby, when the same symbol as the symbol for the hold notice is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, the hold notice with the symbol for the hold notice is executed, while the symbol for the hold notice is displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. If the same symbol is not stopped and displayed, the execution of the suspension notice is restricted. Therefore, when it is possible to execute the suspension notice by the symbol for the suspension notice without changing the variable display time, the suspension notice is executed, while the execution of the reservation notice by the symbol for the suspension notice, When it is necessary to change the variable display time, the execution of the suspension notice is restricted. Therefore, since the suspension notice is performed within the range where the variable display time is not changed, the suspension notice is performed without changing the variable display time. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

  In addition, for example, when the suspension result of the middle symbol row Z2 is grasped and the suspension notice corresponding to the design for notice can be executed based on the suspension result of the middle symbol row Z2, the suspension result corresponding to the suspension notice is set. On the other hand, if the suspension notice corresponding to the notice symbol cannot be executed, a stop result not corresponding to the suspension notice is set. If the suspension result is set, the notice is made based on the stop result of the middle symbol column Z2. It is necessary to determine whether or not the suspension notice corresponding to the design can be executed, and there is a concern that the processing load will increase. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since it is not necessary to make the determination, the processing load can be reduced.

  Further, based on the stop results of the stop line, the reach symbol, and the middle symbol column Z2, a table is provided in which a pattern in which the combination of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed on the activated line is specified in advance, and by referring to the table, It is determined whether or not the pattern corresponds to the pattern. If the pattern corresponds to the pattern, the stop line is set to be changed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the combination of the big hit symbols from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, and to execute the suspension notice using the notice symbol.

  In a situation where the hold information that has already been set as the trigger of the execution of the hold notice is stored, the hold information stored thereafter is not set as the trigger of the execution of the hold notice. As a result, there is no duplicated hold information that triggers the execution of the suspension notice, and the suspension information that triggers the execution of the suspension notice becomes clear. If the hold information that triggers the hold notice is duplicated, it is necessary to consider the other hold information when executing the hold notice related to one hold information, so that the processing may be complicated. By preventing the above duplication, such a situation can be prevented.

  In a situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the hold area RE, the hold information stored thereafter is not set as a trigger for executing the hold notice. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a jackpot result is generated in a game time related to the hold information different from the hold information set as the trigger of the execution of the hold notice in the situation where the hold notice is being executed. .

  In addition, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes the hold notice generation lottery process (step S1601), and when the hold notice generation is won, the hold information targeted for the lottery process is used as an opportunity to execute the hold notice. Is set to In this case, in a situation where the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result and the hold information that does not trigger the execution of the hold notice is stored, the hold information corresponding to the probability change jackpot result is newly stored and the hold information is stored. It may be set to trigger the execution of the suspension notice. In this case, as a reservation notice triggered by the latter reservation information in a game round prior to the game round related to the former reservation information, a combination of symbols for the reservation preliminary announcement is stopped and displayed by a symbol corresponding to the probability change jackpot result. It is assumed that In other words, it is assumed that the combination of the symbols for the hold bonus notice corresponding to the result of the probability jackpot is stopped and displayed, but the combination of the symbols for the jackpot corresponding to the result of the normal jackpot is stopped and displayed in the subsequent game times. . When such an event occurs, although the player expects a probability change jackpot result to occur due to the reservation notice, the jackpot result will actually occur normally, and the player's willingness to play the game will be generated. There is a risk of decline. On the other hand, as described above, in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the hold area RE, the hold information stored thereafter is not set as a trigger for executing the hold notice. As a result, the effects described above can be obtained while preventing a decrease in the willingness to play.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the jackpot symbol or the reach symbol in the game times related to the hold information set as the trigger of the execution of the hold notice is set as the symbol for the hold notice, and when the reach occurs, the symbol for the hold notice is used. In this embodiment, the holding notice is executed or the holding notice itself is not executed. However, in the present embodiment, the effect of the holding notice is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration of the present embodiment that is different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration of the reach notice determination table for hold notice is different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, the reach symbol determination table storage area for hold notice 318 includes a specific symbol hold advance notice reach symbol determination table for determining a reach symbol so as to obtain a stop result corresponding to the hold advance notice by a specific symbol, and a non-specific A reach symbol determination table for a non-specific symbol hold advance notice that determines a reach symbol so as to provide a stop result corresponding to the hold advance notice by a symbol is stored. Then, the processing of FIG. 48 is executed instead of the processing of FIG.

  First, in step S2701, a process for determining a stop line is performed as in the first embodiment. Then, in step S2702, it is determined whether the notice symbol is a specific symbol. When the design for notice is a specific design, the process proceeds to step S2704, and the reach design determination table for specific design holding preliminary notice is referred to. On the other hand, if the design for notice is not a non-specific design, the process advances to step S2703 to refer to the reach design determination table for non-specific design holding preliminary notice.

  The non-specific symbol hold notice reach symbol determination table and the specific symbol hold notice reach symbol determination table combination information table will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 (a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a reach symbol determination table for non-specific symbol reservation advance notice, and FIG. 49 (b) schematically shows a reach symbol determination table for specific symbol suspension advance notice. FIG.

  In the non-specific symbol hold notice reach symbol determination table, symbol information that constitutes a combination of reach symbols is set in one-to-one correspondence with a combination of a stop line and a stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. The information of the type of the reach symbol is specified by referring to the stop line determined in the stop line determination process and the information of the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 determined by the variable display time.

  Specifically, when the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, an even-numbered symbol, a specific symbol, that is, a reach symbol such that the stop result corresponding to the reserved announcement by the odd-numbered symbol is not obtained. Is set. For example, when it is specified that the reach line is the left line L1 and the symbol “1” is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2, the reach symbol is determined to be “4”. That is, the information of the combination of the reach symbols is specified such that the symbol “4” is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol column Z1 and the left line L1 of the lower symbol column Z3. In this case, as shown in FIG. 50A, the symbol “4” is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z3, and “1” is displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. Only the symbols are stopped and displayed. There is no symbol that is stopped and displayed in common for all symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In other words, when the symbols stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 are only the specific symbols, the reach symbol does not have a stop result of the hold notice due to the combination of the reach symbols and the stop symbol in the middle symbol column Z2. And so on. In other words, when the symbols stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 are only the specific symbols, the execution of the suspension notice is restricted.

  When only a specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 as described above, the setting is made so that the holding notice is not executed, and the holding which has caused the condition for executing the holding notice is satisfied. Despite the jackpot result or the reach display being generated by the non-specific symbol in the game round related to the information, the hold announcement is executed by the specific symbol in the game round related to the hold announcement earlier than the game round. Is prevented. If the reservation notice is executed for a specific symbol, the player is expected to expect the occurrence of a probable variable jackpot result in which the same combination of the specific symbols will eventually stop on the activated line. In the event that a combination of reach symbols or a combination of jackpot symbols is finally displayed by a non-specific symbol, it is feared that the above-mentioned expectation is impaired and the willingness to continue the game is reduced, but this pachinko machine According to the configuration of FIG. 10, this can be prevented.

  When the stop line is the left line L1 and it is specified that the symbol “1” is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2, the symbol constituting the combination of the reach symbols is determined to be “4”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern of “2” may be used. In short, any structure other than the stop symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 may be specified as a symbol constituting the combination of the reach symbols.

  Further, the non-specific symbol reach symbol determination table is set to specify the same symbol as the non-specific symbol as the reach symbol when the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. For example, when it is specified that the stop line is the left line L1 and the symbol “1” is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, the reach symbol is specified as the symbol “2”. In such a case, the symbol “2” is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, and the symbol “2” is stopped and displayed on the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2. . As a result, a stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by the non-specific symbol is obtained. In other words, the suspension notice using the non-specific symbol is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (b), the specific symbol reach symbol determination table has a one-to-one correspondence with the combination of the stop line and the stop result of the middle symbol column Z2, as in the non-specific symbol reach symbol determination table. The information of the symbols constituting the combination of the reach symbols is set correspondingly. Reach symbol information is specified with reference to the stop line determined in the stop line determination process and the information of the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 determined by the variable display time. At this time, if only non-specific symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, a reach symbol is selected so that the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice is not obtained.

  For example, when the stop line is the left line L1 and it is specified that the symbol “2” is stopped in the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2, the reach symbol is identified as the symbol “1”. As a result, there is no symbol that is stopped and displayed in common in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. That is, the suspension result does not correspond to the suspension notice. That is, the execution of the suspension notice is restricted. When the stop line is the left line L1 and it is specified that the symbol “2” is stopped in the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2, the symbol “1” is selected as the reach symbol. It is not limited, and may be “3”. In short, any symbol other than the symbol of “2” which is the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by the non-specific symbol may be used. That is, when only non-specific symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, a combination of reach symbols by a symbol other than the non-specific symbols may be selected.

  Further, when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the same symbol as the specific symbol is set as a symbol constituting a combination of reach symbols. For example, when it is specified that the stop line is the middle line L2 and the symbol “2” is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, the symbol constituting the combination of the reach symbols is identified as “3”. Is done. That is, the information of the combination of the reach symbols is specified such that the symbol “3” is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 of the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3. In such a case, the symbol “3” is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, and the symbol “3” is stopped and displayed on L3 of the middle symbol row Z2. . As a result, the suspension notice by the specific symbol is executed.

  Note that the specific combination information table is not limited to such a configuration, and may be configured to specify, for example, the same symbol as the stop symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 as the reach symbol. Accordingly, in the reach display, the suspension notice can be executed without changing the variable display time. In this case, irrespective of the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the suspension notice by the specific symbol or the non-specific symbol is executed. That is, although the combination of the reach symbol and the combination of the big hit symbols of the specific symbol are finally stopped and displayed, the suspension notice by the non-specific symbol is executed. Then, even if the suspension notice is given by the non-specific symbol, the player can finally be regarded as having been promoted from the non-specific symbol to the specific symbol, which reduces the desire to continue the game. It is thought that there is not. In short, when the design for the notice is a non-specific symbol, that is, when the game result in the game time that triggered the execution of the reservation notice is a normal jackpot result, it is sufficient to limit the execution of the reservation notice by the specific symbol.

  In addition, in such a configuration, when a hold notice is continuously performed in a plurality of game times, and when a combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed in a previous game time, a non-specific symbol is displayed in a later game time. It is preferable that the combination of is not stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to satisfactorily increase the player's expectation that a probability-variable jackpot result will occur when a suspension notice is continuously performed in a plurality of game times.

  Subsequent processing is the same as in the first embodiment. However, since the conditions of the suspension notice are different from those of the first embodiment, the suspension notice stop line change table may be changed accordingly.

<Specific form of suspension notice>
Next, a specific mode of the hold notice accompanied by the reach display will be described. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific mode of the suspension notice. FIG. 52 shows a case where a jackpot result occurs in the game times related to the hold information that has caused the establishment of the condition for executing the hold notice, and the game times related to the hold notice up to the last game time are not shown. This is the case where the reach display occurs twice in both cases. The combination of the big hit symbols indicates that the case (a) is the non-specific symbol “6” and the case (b) is the specific symbol “7”.

  As a result of the symbol stop in the first game round shown in FIG. 52 (a-1), the combination of the reach symbols is stopped and displayed on the left line L1, and the symbol “1” is displayed on the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2. Is stopped. In this case, symbols of the same type are not stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the execution of the suspension notice is restricted.

  In addition, as for the stop result of the symbol in the first game round shown in FIG. 52 (a-2), the combination of the reach symbols including the symbol “2” is stopped and displayed on the left line L1, and the middle symbol column Z2 is displayed. The symbol "2" is stopped and displayed on the right line L3. Thereby, the symbol “2” of the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  Thereafter, in the last game round shown in FIG. 52 (a-3), the combination of the big hit symbols with the symbol "6" is stopped and displayed on the one activated line. In other words, in the pattern shown in FIG. 52 (a), in the game times related to the suspension notice, when the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is only a specific symbol, the execution of the suspension notice is restricted and the middle symbol row Z2 In the case where the non-specific symbol is stopped, a suspension notice by the non-specific symbol is executed. In other words, the design for the notice is limited to the non-specific design.

  FIG. 52 (b) shows a case where a hold notice is executed in all of the game times related to the hold notice and a reach display is generated in each of the game times. In this case, as for the stop result of the symbol in the first game round shown in FIG. 52 (b-1), the combination of the reach symbol consisting of the symbol “3” is stopped and displayed on the left line L1, and the middle symbol column The symbol “3” is stopped and displayed on the right line L3 of Z2. Thereby, the symbol “3” of the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  As for the stop result of the symbol in the first game round shown in FIG. 52 (b-2), the combination of the reach symbol consisting of the symbol “5” is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, and the right of the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. The symbol “5” is stopped and displayed on the line L3. Thereby, the symbol “5” of the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  Thereafter, in the final game round shown in FIG. 52 (b-3), the combination of the big hit symbols with the symbol of "7" is stopped and displayed on the one activated line. That is, in the pattern shown in FIG. 52 (b), the notice symbol is unified to the specific symbol in all the game times related to the reservation notice.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The type of the symbol for the reservation notice is made to correspond to the type of the jackpot result in the game times related to the reservation information set as the trigger of the execution of the reservation notice. Specifically, when the game result in the game round related to the hold information set as the trigger of the execution of the hold notice is a probability change jackpot result, the hold notice with the specific symbol is set to be executed, while the hold notice is set. In the case where the game result in the game round related to the hold information set as a trigger of the execution of is a normal jackpot result, the setting is made to execute the hold advance notice by the non-specific symbol. Thereby, it becomes possible to associate the mode of the stop result with the game times in which the suspension notice is performed and the game times related to the suspension information set as the trigger of the execution of the suspension notice, and the fluctuation display of the symbols in these successive game times The pattern can be provided to the player as a series.

  In particular, in the reach display in which the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, when it is specified that only the specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 which is the final stopped symbol column, the stop symbol is displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. The design which is different from the design which is designated as the reach design. As a result, the execution of the suspension notice by the specific symbol is restricted. When the symbol for the advance notice is a non-specific symbol, the game result of the game times related to the hold information set as the trigger of the execution of the hold advance notice may be a normal jackpot result. In this case, despite the fact that the hold notice by the specific symbol was executed, the combination of the jackpot symbols of the non-specific symbols was actually stopped and displayed, and the player was expected to have a probable change jackpot by special notification. Nevertheless, in practice, it usually becomes a jackpot, which may lead to a decrease in the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, in the reach display in which the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, by restricting the execution of the reservation announcement by the specific symbol, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the game motivation.

  In the first embodiment, in the game times related to the hold information set as the trigger of the execution of the hold notice, the hold notice is executed with the same symbol as the symbol when the jackpot or the reach occurs. In the case where it is impossible to execute the advance notice of the symbol without changing the variable display time, the execution of the advance notice itself is limited. Specifically, in the reach display, only when the symbol for notice is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, the reservation notice is performed, and otherwise, the reservation notice is not executed. As a result, the game times related to the hold information set as a trigger of the execution of the reservation notice and the game times for executing the reservation notice are closely associated with each other, while the frequency of execution of the reservation notice has been reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the preview symbol is a specific symbol or a non-specific symbol, and when the preview symbol is a non-specific symbol, the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. If it is specified that the reach symbol is specified so that the suspension notice is executed by the non-specific symbol. Thereby, non-specified without changing the variable display time, except when only the specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol row Z2, that is, when the odd symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2. The suspension notice by the symbol will be executed. That is, as compared with the first embodiment, the frequency at which the suspension notice is executed increases. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, a stop result setting process for off-normal reach corresponding to the suspension notice is different from the other embodiments. The different points will be described below.

  In the stop result setting process for off-normal reach corresponding to the suspension notice in the present embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 53, first, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the notice symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. Is determined. The stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is grasped in the stop result grasping process of the middle symbol row Z2 in step S2308 in the stop result setting process (see FIG. 37) corresponding to the suspension notice. If it is specified that the notice symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the process advances to step S2802 to refer to the pending notice correspondence table.

  The suspension notice correspondence table is stored in a dedicated storage area of the program ROM 253, and the stop line information and the combination information of the design are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the type information of the notice symbol and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. Is uniquely set. Here, the stop line information and the combination information of the symbols set in the table are based on the notice type information and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 without changing the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. It is set so as to result in the off-normal reach stop result, and the notice symbol is set to be stopped and displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. By referring to the suspension notice correspondence table, the stop line information and the combination information of the symbols are uniquely identified from the type information of the notice symbol and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2.

  The stop line information and the symbol combination information are set so that the combination of the big hit symbols is not stopped on any of the activated lines. Further, the stop line information and the combination information of the symbols are set so as not to be the stop result corresponding to the suspension announcement by the symbol other than the symbol for the announcement. That is, the symbols stopped and displayed in common in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are limited to only the symbols for the notice.

  After that, in step S2803, the storage process of the address information of the stop information is executed, and the process ends. The storing process is the same as the storing process of the stop information address information in FIG. 38, and thus the description is omitted.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the notice symbol is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, a negative determination is made in step S2801. In this case, as shown in FIG. 54, a stop result setting process for off-normal reach which does not correspond to the suspension notice is executed. The setting process corresponds to the process executed in step S1903 in the change start process (FIG. 29). That is, the processing of steps S2901 to S2907 corresponds to the processing of steps S2101 to S2107 shown in FIG.

  Specifically, in step S2901, a process of arbitrarily selecting a reach line is executed. More specifically, the numerical information stored in the line information update area 328 at that time is obtained, and a reach line corresponding to the obtained numerical information is selected.

  In a succeeding step S2902, a process of arbitrarily selecting a reach symbol is executed. In detail, at that time, the numerical information stored in the reach symbol update area 330 is acquired, and the reach symbol corresponding to the acquired numerical information is selected.

  In the processing of subsequent steps S2903 to S2905, when the combination of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed from the reach symbol and the reach line determined by the lottery, or the stop result corresponding to the hold notice by a symbol other than the symbol for the announcement, If so, a process for changing the reach symbol or the reach line is executed.

  First, in step S2903, a change table is referred to instead of the jackpot change table. In addition to the table for avoiding the combination of jackpot symbols in the change table, in order to avoid a stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by the combination of jackpot symbols and symbols other than the symbol for the announcement Table is set.

  The table for avoiding the combination of the big hit symbols will be described. The table shows the change reach corresponding to the combination of the stop result, the reach symbol, and the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2 which is the big hit symbol combination. Line is set. The change reach line is a reach line set based on the stop result and the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 so that the combination of the big hit symbols is not stopped and displayed.

  A table for avoiding the stop result corresponding to the reserved announcement by the combination of the jackpot symbol and the symbol other than the symbol for the announcement will be described. A changed reach symbol is set corresponding to a combination of the stop result, the reach symbol, and the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2 in which the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by the symbol other than the symbol is displayed. The changed reach symbol is displayed based on the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 and the determined reach line so that the combination of the big hit symbols is not stopped and displayed, and the stop result corresponding to the hold notice by the symbol other than the notice symbol is displayed. The reach pattern is set so that it is not performed.

  Here, in step S2903, a determination process is first performed to determine whether or not a notice condition satisfaction flag is stored. When the notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, the former table is referred to. On the other hand, when the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, the latter table is referred to.

  If it is determined in step S2904 that there is no corresponding information, the process advances to step S2906. On the other hand, when it is determined that the corresponding information is present, if the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, it means that the combination of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed, and the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored. In this case, it means that the combination of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed, or the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by a symbol other than the symbol for the announcement is displayed. In this case, the process advances to step S2905 to execute the change process. In the change process, in a situation where the notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, the reach line is changed to the changed reach line by referring to the former table so that the combination of the big hit symbols is not stopped and displayed. Also, in the situation where the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, by referring to the latter table, the combination of the big hit symbols is not stopped and displayed, and the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by the symbol other than the notice symbol is displayed. The reach symbol is changed to the change reach symbol so that it does not become.

  As a result, when the execution condition of the reservation notice is not satisfied, the reach symbol or the reach line is not changed even if the stop result corresponding to the reservation notice by the symbol other than the symbol for the notice is obtained. It has become. That is, when the execution condition of the hold notice is not satisfied, the execution of the out-of-order reach display is not restricted.

  Thereafter, in step S2906, a process of determining symbol combination information is executed. In this process, by referring to the combination information table, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the reach line (the changed reach line when the reach line is changed), and the reach symbol (the changed reach when the reach line is changed) The information of the combination of the reach symbols according to the combination of the symbols is specified. As described above, the reach symbol combination indicates a combination of three symbols including the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2.

  After that, in step S2907, the storage process of the address information of the stop information is executed. This process is the same as step S2107.

  In the present embodiment described in detail above, it is determined whether or not the suspension notice corresponding to the symbol for the notice can be executed without changing the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. While the design is set to a design corresponding to the design for the preview, when it cannot be executed, an arbitrary reach design is selected.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the reach symbol corresponding to the notice symbol is determined without performing the above determination. As a result, it is not necessary to make the above determination, so that the processing load can be reduced. On the other hand, when the probability of winning is different between the probability jackpot and the normal jackpot, the frequency of the selected notice symbol is biased. May occur. Specifically, for example, when the probability of winning a probability change jackpot is relatively higher than the probability of winning a normal jackpot, a specific symbol is likely to be selected as the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed in the game cycle of the jackpot. Then, when the big hit symbol is set as a preview symbol, a specific symbol is more easily selected as a preview symbol than a non-specific symbol. Thereby, regardless of whether or not the suspension notice corresponding to the notice symbol can be executed without changing the stop result of the middle symbol column Z2, the reach symbol corresponding to the notice symbol is selected in the first embodiment. In the mode (or the second embodiment), the reach symbols are biased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the reach picture is changed only when the hold notice corresponding to the notice symbol is executable, the probability of winning in the probability change jackpot and the normal jackpot is different. Even if there is, there is little bias in the selected reach symbols.

  In the off-normal-reach stop result setting process corresponding to the on-hold notice in the present embodiment, the combination of the stop line and the symbol is uniquely determined by referring to the on-hold notice correspondence table so that the off-normal reach stop result corresponding to the on-hold notice is obtained. Is determined. As a result, the processing merely refers to the suspension notice correspondence table and sets the stop information uniquely derived based on the table, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the notice symbol is stopped in the middle symbol row Z2, and the processing is performed according to the determination result. On the other hand, by adopting a configuration in which a stop result corresponding to the suspension notice is set in the process of referring to the table, it is possible to avoid inconvenience caused by providing the above determination process. However, from the viewpoint of the diversity of the stop results, the first embodiment is superior.

  Further, the suspension notice correspondence table is set so that the suspension result corresponding to the suspension notice by a symbol other than the symbol for the preliminary announcement is not made, and the combination of the big hit symbols is not stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5. It is set as follows. Thereby, it is possible to appropriately execute the suspension notice without causing confusion to the player.

  In the off-normal reach stop result setting process that does not correspond to the hold announcement, the hold announcement by a symbol other than the announcement symbol is performed by a combination of the reach symbol and the reach line determined by the lottery and the symbol stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. When the stop result corresponding to the symbol is stopped and displayed, the reach symbol is changed so that the stop result corresponding to the hold announcement by a symbol other than the symbol for announcement is not stopped and displayed. As a result, the game times that triggered the execution of the reservation notice and the game times related to the reservation notice can be associated with each other.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the during-variation process in the game in which the reach occurs is different from that of the first embodiment. The difference will be described below.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 55, in the during-variation processing according to the present embodiment, the processing of steps S3001 to S3019 is similar to the processing of steps S2601 to S2619 of FIG. In the present embodiment, in step S3001, in the case of a gaming cycle in which a jackpot or a reach has occurred, the process proceeds to step S3020 to execute a reach handling process. In the reach correspondence process, a new prize to the operating ports 33, 34 is not a game time for which the hold notice is being executed and is not a game time related to the hold information that has caused the execution of the hold notice. This is a process for executing the hold advance notice while performing the reach display at the current game time when the hold advance notice execution condition is satisfied for the hold information generated based on the winning.

  The processing will be described in detail. First, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the current game round is a jackpot. In the case of the game round in which the jackpot has occurred, the reach correspondence processing is terminated as it is.

  If a big hit has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S3102. Here, the processing of step S3102 and step S3103 is the same as the processing of step S2602 and step S2603 of the above-described processing during fluctuation (FIG. 44), and thus the description is omitted.

  In a succeeding step S3104, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is grasped. This process is the same as the process of step S2007 in the stop result setting process (see FIG. 30) that does not correspond to the suspension notice.

  Thereafter, in step S3105, it is determined whether or not all the symbol rows are changing at high speed. If it is determined that all the symbol rows are changing at high speed, the process proceeds to step S3106, and it is determined whether or not the notice symbol stops in the middle symbol row Z2.

  When it is specified that the notice symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol row Z2, it means that the stop result corresponding to the reserved notice by the notice symbol cannot be stopped and displayed without changing the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. Then, the processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is specified that the notice symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the process advances to step S3107 to execute the off-normal reach stop result setting process corresponding to the hold notice. This processing is similar to the processing shown in FIG. Thereby, the stop result of the off-normal reach corresponding to the suspension notice is set, and the address information of the stop information corresponding to the newly set stop result is stored. That is, the stop information set in the fluctuation start processing is corrected to stop information corresponding to the suspension notice. Here, the stop information corrected by the process is referred to as corrected stop information. Note that this process may be performed in FIG. 38 instead of the process in FIG.

  In step S3108, a reach corresponding first-stage correction table as a first-stage correction information group corresponding to the reach display is referred to. The reach corresponding first stage correction table is stored in a correction table storage area 320 as correction information group storage means provided in the program ROM 253. As shown in FIG. 57 (a), the reach first-stage correction table is a one-to-one correspondence with an arbitrary combination of the initial fluctuation display pattern information and the correction stop information when the out-of-reach display occurs. 1, the information of the variable display pattern for the first correction corresponding to the reach is set, and the address information is set corresponding to the information of the variable display pattern for the first correction of the reach. In this case, all the information of the fluctuation display pattern for the first correction corresponding to the reach is changed during the period T1 from the start of the fluctuation (from the start of the fluctuation display in the upper symbol row Z1 until the switching from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display). Is set as information of the variable display pattern after the elapse of the period. In the off-normal reach stop result setting process corresponding to the suspension notice, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is not changed, so that the information of the change display pattern for each reach corresponding first correction is the initially set change display pattern. The variable display time in the display pattern is not changed.

  In the subsequent step S3109, address information corresponding to the reach-ready first correction variation display pattern specified in step S3108 is specified from the reach-ready first-stage correction table, and the specified address information is provided in the work RAM 254. The modified information address is stored in the storage area 333.

  Since the address information for the first reach corresponding correction is stored in the correction information address storage area 333, the MPU 252 determines based on the information in the elapsed time counter area 332 that the period of T1 has elapsed since the start of the change. Thereafter, an internal command is generated and output to the VDP 255 so that a symbol corresponding to the information on the reach-ready first correction variable display pattern set this time is displayed. As a result, when the fluctuation display of the symbol is stopped, the out-of-reach result corresponding to the symbol for the notice is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G.

  Note that the information of the variable display pattern for the first reach corresponding stored in the reach corresponding first stage correction table includes not only the content of the variable display of the symbol but also the background displayed together with the variable display of the symbol. Information on images and information on images of reach effects are also included. Therefore, by outputting an internal command corresponding to the set variation display pattern for the first correction corresponding to the reach to the VDP 255, the background image is displayed together with the symbol variation display, and further, the reach effect image is displayed. Is done. This is the same for the information of the variable display pattern for the second correction described later.

  After that, the notice execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S3110, and then the current change processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S3105 that all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not changing at high speed, it is determined in step S3111 whether the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed. Specifically, the current value stored in the elapsed time counter area 332 is the time T2 in the elapsed time table storage area 319 (from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display in the lower symbol column Z3 is changed from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display). Is determined to be less than the counter value corresponding to (the period in which the switching is performed).

  When it is determined that the lower symbol row Z3 is not changing at high speed, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lower symbol sequence Z3 is changing at high speed, in step S3112, the stop result of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is grasped based on the information stored in the stop information address storage area 329. I do. Specifically, among the lines L1 to L3 in the upper symbol row Z1, the symbol stopped on the right line L3 is specified.

  Next, in the processing of step S3113 to step S3115, it is determined whether or not the suspension notice corresponding to the symbol for notice can be executed without changing the stop result of the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2, and can be executed. In this case, a process of correcting the stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 so as to obtain the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice is executed.

  First, in step S3113, reference is made to the lower symbol row stop result correction table stored in the correction table storage area 320. As shown in FIG. 58, the lower symbol row stop result correction table stops and displays the stop result corresponding to the hold notice by the preview symbol from the stop result of the upper symbol row Z1, the notice symbol, and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. This is a table in which possible patterns are extracted in advance. In step S3114, it is determined whether or not the combination of the stop result of the upper symbol row Z1, the notice symbol, and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 this time is the combination set in the lower symbol row stop result correction table. . Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is specified that the notice symbol is stopped in both the middle symbol row Z2 and the upper symbol row Z1.

  Here, in a situation in which the high-speed change of the pattern in the upper symbol row Z1 has been completed, the player can recognize the pattern being displayed while the pattern is being changed. For this reason, if the mode of the variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 is changed in such a situation, an unnatural mode caused by the change is likely to be recognized by the player, and the player may feel uncomfortable. Further, as described above, it is not preferable to change the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 in the normal reach display. Therefore, in the case of the game times related to the normal reach display, and in the case where the high-speed fluctuation of the symbols in the upper symbol column Z1 has been completed, when executing the suspension notice by the symbol for the announcement, the upper symbol column Z1 and the middle symbol are used. The same symbol as the symbol for the notice needs to be stopped and displayed in the column Z2. Therefore, in the lower symbol row stop result correction table, a pattern in the case where the same symbol as the notice symbol is stopped and displayed in both the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2 is set.

  If the determination result is affirmative, it means that the suspension notice corresponding to the symbol for the notice can be executed, and thus, in step S3115, the stop result setting process of the lower symbol row Z3 is executed. In this process, the stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is determined so as to be a stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by the notice symbol. Specifically, in the lower symbol row stop result correction table, the correction stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is set in accordance with a combination of the stop result of the upper symbol row Z1, the notice symbol, and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. Have been. As for the correction stop result of the lower symbol row Z3, the symbol for notice is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the reach symbol and the reach line are uniquely set so as to obtain the off-reach result.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 59 (a-1), from the top, a symbol “2”, a sub symbol between the symbol “4” and the symbol “1”, and a symbol “2” are displayed on the left line L1. When the initial stop result is set such that the symbol is stopped and displayed, there is no symbol that is stopped and displayed in common in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In other words, the stop result does not correspond to the suspension notice.

  On the other hand, under the condition that the high-speed fluctuation display of the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped, the execution condition of the hold announcement is satisfied, and when the type information of the symbol for the announcement is “1”, the right line L3 is displayed. The stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is corrected so that the symbol “1” is stopped and displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 59 (a-2), the symbol “1” is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Therefore, the stop result is a stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by the notice symbol.

  In this case, as a result of the correction stop of the lower symbol row Z3, the symbol “1” is set to be stopped and displayed on the right line L3, but reach is generated and “1” is displayed in the lower symbol row Z3. From the viewpoint of the stop display, it is conceivable to stop and display the symbol “1” on the left line L1. However, when the symbol “1” is stopped and displayed on the left line L1, the symbol “2” is stopped and displayed on each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. A similar stop result may result in confusion for the player. On the other hand, when the symbol “1” is stopped and displayed on the right line L3, the symbol “2” is not stopped and displayed on the lower symbol row Z3, so that such inconvenience is avoided. In other words, while the stop result corresponding to the reservation notice by the same symbol as the notice design is obtained, it is suppressed that other symbols have the same stop result as in the case of the reservation notice. In other words, execution of the suspension notice by another symbol is restricted. Therefore, the game times of the reservation notice and the game times of the jackpot are closely related.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 59 (b-1), for example, the symbol “1”, the symbol “3”, and the symbol “1” are stopped and displayed on the right line L3 from the top. In the situation where the result is set and the high-speed fluctuation of the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped, when the execution condition of the hold announcement in which the type information of the announcement symbol is “2” is satisfied, “2” is displayed in the right line L3. The stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is corrected so that the symbol "" is stopped and displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 59 (b-2), the symbol “2” is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and corresponds to the reservation notice by the symbol “2” which is a symbol for notice. The stopped result is displayed. That is, the suspension notice is executed by the notice design. In this case, the reach display is changed from the single reach display to the double reach display.

  Here, from the viewpoint of generating reach and stopping and displaying the symbol “2” in the lower symbol row Z3, it is conceivable to stop and display the symbol “2” on the left line L1. However, when the symbol “2” is stopped and displayed on the left line L1, the combination of the big hit symbols with the symbol “2” is stopped and displayed on the left line L1. Therefore, such a stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is excluded from the lower symbol row stop result correction table.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (c-1), in the double reach display of the symbol “1” and the symbol “2”, the symbol “1” and the symbol “2” are stopped in the middle symbol row Z2. When displayed, the stop result corresponds to the suspension notice using the symbol “1” and the symbol “2”. In such a case, when the high-speed fluctuation of the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and the execution condition of the hold announcement by the symbol whose type information of the announcement symbol is "1" is satisfied, "1" is displayed on the right line L3. The stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is corrected so that the symbol No. is stopped and displayed. As a result, the double-reach display is changed to the single-reach display, and a stop result corresponding to the suspension notice using only the symbol “1” is obtained. That is, the execution of the suspension notice using the symbol “2” is restricted.

  In the lower symbol row stop result correction table, a stop result in which the main symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 in the upper symbol row Z1 is not set. If the main symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, the main symbol stopped and displayed on the upper symbol column Z1 is only the symbol displayed on the middle line L2, and the reach line is limited to L2. You. As a result, when the reach display is executed in this situation, the stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is uniquely determined. Therefore, there is no room to correct the stop result of the lower symbol row Z3. On the other hand, when the main symbol is stopped and displayed on the right line L3 or the left line L1, there are two main symbols stopped and displayed on the upper symbol column Z1, and further selectable reach lines are all except the middle line L2. Line. Thereby, it is possible to change the reach symbol or the reach line by changing the stop result of the lower symbol row Z3, and it is also possible to change from the single reach display to the double reach display. Therefore, there is room for correcting the stop result of the lower symbol row Z3.

  Further, the situation where the symbol “1” is stopped and displayed on the right line L3 is the same as the situation where the symbol “2” is stopped and displayed on the left line L1. No need to consider. In short, what is necessary is just to extract a pattern assumed for one of the right line L3 and the left line L1.

  After executing the processing of step S3115, in step S3116, the storage processing of the address information of the correction stop information is executed, and the address information of the correction stop information is stored. In the subsequent step S3117, the reach corresponding second stage correction table as the reach corresponding second stage correction information group stored in the correction table storage area 320 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 57 (b), the reach correspondence second-stage correction table has a one-to-one correspondence with an arbitrary combination of the information of the initial fluctuation display pattern and the correction stop information in the off-reach display. The information of the variable display pattern for the second correction corresponding to the reach is set, and the address information is set corresponding to the information of the variable display pattern for the second correction of the reach. In this case, the information of the variable display pattern for the second correction corresponding to the reach is all set as the information of the variable display pattern after a period of T2 has elapsed from the start of the change.

  In step S3118, the reach-ready second correction address information (second correction information) corresponding to the combination of the correction stop information and the information stored in the pattern information address storage area 331 is reached in the reach-ready second stage correction. The specified address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 333.

  Since the address information for the second correction corresponding to the reach is stored in the correction information address storage area 333, the MPU 252 determines, based on the information in the elapsed time counter area 332, that the period of T2 has elapsed since the start of the change. Generates and outputs an internal command to the VDP 255 such that a symbol corresponding to the information of the reach-corresponding second correction variable display pattern set this time is displayed. As a result, when the fluctuation display of the symbols is stopped, the combination of the big hit symbols is not stopped on all the activated lines, and the stop result corresponding to the holding advance notice by the symbols other than the symbols for the announcement is not stopped and displayed. , The same symbol as the notice symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  After that, the notice execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S3119, and then the current change processing ends.

  Here, if the determination result in step S3114 is a negative determination, it means that the stop result for the hold notice by the notice symbol cannot be displayed without changing the stop result of the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2. . Specifically, it means that it has been specified that at least one of the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2 is not stopped and displayed for the notice symbol. In this case, the present process ends. That is, the initial stop result that does not correspond to the suspension notice is displayed. In other words, when it is not possible to display the stop result for the hold notice by the notice symbol without changing the stop result of the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2, the execution of the hold notice is restricted.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  A new prize is generated in the operating ports 33 and 34 in the middle of the game in which the off-normal reach display is executed, and the reservation notice of the hold information acquired based on the winning can be made in the game. As a result, the frequency of execution of the suspension notice increases, so that the player has more opportunities to confirm the suspension notice.

  In the game time where the off-normal reach display is executed, even if the suspension notice is given while the symbol change display is being performed, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 already determined in the game time changes. Was not done. As a result, the time required to complete each game time may fluctuate in a configuration in which a situation in which a hold notice is given in the game time even when the symbol display is being displayed is fluctuated. Is suppressed.

  In the case of performing the off-normal reach display, in the case where the stop result for the hold notice is displayed in the middle of the symbol change display being performed, the stop result is stored in the correction table storage area 320 of the program ROM 253 in advance. By setting the information of the variable display pattern for correction. The information on the variable display pattern for correction is set in one-to-one correspondence with the information on the variable display pattern that can be set at the start of the game round, and the fluctuation after a predetermined variable display time in each game round is set. It is set as a display pattern. Thus, the display control device 212 can be used to change the previously set stop result mode while the variable display of the symbol is being performed while the variable display time of the symbol that has already been determined is not changed. In the MPU 252, the information of the variation display pattern for correction corresponding to the already set variation display pattern may be set. Therefore, the MPU 252 does not need to calculate the remaining time of the variable display and generate the information of the variable display pattern based on the calculation result, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In addition, when the symbol display is performed in the symbol display device 41, the variable display is stopped after switching from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, when changing the mode of the stop result already set in the course of performing the variable display of the symbols, the variable display patterns after the switching timing to the low-speed variable display are changed for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. This is performed by changing to a variable display pattern for correction. This makes it possible to change the mode of the stop result without giving the player an uncomfortable feeling, as compared with a configuration in which the fluctuation display pattern is changed while the low-speed fluctuation display is being performed.

  In particular, in a configuration in which the switching to the low-speed variation display is sequentially performed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, information on the variation display pattern for correction is set corresponding to each switching timing of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. . Thereby, compared to the configuration in which the information of the variable display pattern for correction is not set corresponding to each switching timing, when the decision to perform the hold notice is made in the middle of the game round, The opportunity to start the reservation notice increases.

  In the game time for performing the off-normal reach display, when the high-speed fluctuation display of the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and the execution condition of the hold notice is satisfied in a situation where the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at a high speed, the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. Without changing the stop result and the stop result of the upper symbol row Z1, it is determined whether or not the stop result for the hold notice corresponding to the symbol for the notice can be displayed, and if the stop result can be displayed, the stop result is set. While the stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is corrected, when the display is not possible, the initial stop result is displayed. Thereby, regardless of whether or not the suspension result for the hold notice can be displayed, the suspension result of the upper symbol row Z1 for which the high-speed fluctuation has ended is not changed. Therefore, the player does not recognize an unnatural aspect that can be caused by changing the display aspect of the upper symbol row Z1 during the low-speed fluctuation display. Here, since the player can recognize the display mode of the pattern during the low-speed fluctuation display, an unnatural mode that can be caused by changing the display mode during the low-speed fluctuation display is that the pattern is during the high-speed fluctuation display. Is easier for the player to recognize than when changing to. For this reason, it is easy to give a sense of incongruity to the player by changing the display mode. Therefore, by not changing the display mode of the upper symbol sequence Z1 after the high-speed change is completed, it is possible to correct the suspension result for the suspension notice while suppressing the occurrence of a sense of incongruity that may be caused by the change.

  When the correction is performed, not only the initial reach pattern but also the reach line can be changed. As a result, since the range that can be modified is expanded, the frequency of execution of the suspension notice corresponding to the design for the notice can be further increased, and the reach display can be diversified. Further, when the stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is corrected, the reach pattern and the reach line are uniquely determined. Thereby, the processing load can be reduced.

  It is determined whether or not the notice symbol is stopped in the middle symbol row Z2 (or the middle symbol row Z2 and the upper symbol row Z1 when the high-speed fluctuation display of the upper symbol row Z1 is finished), and the middle symbol row Z2 ( When the high-speed fluctuation display of the upper symbol row Z1 is finished, when it is determined that the notice symbol does not stop in the middle symbol row Z2 or the upper symbol row Z1), a process of correcting the stop result is executed. I did not do it. Thus, the stop result is not corrected until the suspension notice by the notice symbol cannot be executed, so that the storage capacity of the modification table can be reduced.

  In addition, when the stop result of the hold notice corresponding to the symbol for the notice can be displayed without changing the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 and the stop result of the upper symbol row Z1, it is possible to correspond to the hold notice not corresponding to the symbol for the notice. The stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is determined so that the stop result does not result. As a result, the game times related to the suspension notice and the game times that triggered the execution of the suspension notice can be closely associated with each other.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the content described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or some or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments.

  (1) In each of the above embodiments, the symbols that constitute the combination of the reach symbols are determined based on the stop line, the type of the symbol for the notice, and the stop result of the middle symbol column Z2. Not done. For example, a configuration may be used in which information on the combination of the stop line and the reach symbol is uniquely specified based on the type of the notice symbol and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. In this case, information on the combination of the stop line and the reach symbol may be set in advance so that the combination of the big hit symbols is not stopped and displayed on the activated line. This eliminates the need to execute the stop line changing process, thereby reducing the processing load. In this case, since the stop result of the symbol is uniquely determined from the stop result of the notice symbol and the middle symbol row Z2, it is not preferable from the viewpoint of the diversity of the stop result.

  (2) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol “1” is set so as to pass through the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2 at the reach generation timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 7 "may be set to pass. In short, it is only necessary that the mode of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the last stopped symbol row, is determined at the reach generation timing.

  (3) In each of the above embodiments, the super-reach display is such that, at the reach occurrence timing, the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the last stopped symbol row, is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. At a predetermined timing (for example, a timing at which the "7" symbol passes through the middle line L2 in the middle symbol row Z2), the display is switched from the low-speed fluctuation display to the high-speed fluctuation display, and thereafter, is again switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. However, it is not limited to this. For example, even at the reach generation timing, the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is not switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and the high-speed fluctuation display is maintained. Similarly, in the reach display that is switched to the display, by replacing the symbol during the high-speed change, the hold announcement with the symbol corresponding to the symbol for the announcement can be executed.

  (4) In the above embodiments, the reach generation timing is constant with respect to the fluctuation start timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach generation timing with respect to the fluctuation start timing is changed according to the fluctuation display mode (variation display time). May be varied. In such a case, the reach generation timing may be set so that the hold notice using the symbol corresponding to the notice symbol can be executed without changing the variable display time. In such a case, the reach start timing fluctuates depending on the holding notice and the design for notice, so that the above-described embodiments are superior in that the holding notice can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  (5) In the above embodiments, the symbol “4” is provided between the symbol “9” and the symbol “1” in the middle symbol row Z2, but the symbol “4” is not provided. You may. However, in such a case, when the symbol “9”, which is the specific symbol, stops on the left line L1, the symbol “1”, which is also the specific symbol, stops on the left line L1, and the middle symbol column Z2 The non-specific symbol will not stop. Accordingly, in the second embodiment, the execution of the reservation notice by the non-specific symbol is restricted, and the frequency of the reservation notice is reduced.

  (6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the combination of the jackpot symbols is stopped in advance on the activated line by specifying a pattern that is a combination of the jackpot symbols in advance and changing the reach line when the pattern is applicable. Although the configuration is set so as not to be performed, it is not limited to this. For example, it is determined whether or not the combination of the big hit symbols on each of the activated lines L1 to L5 is stopped on the activated line. When it is determined that the combination of the big hit symbols is stopped on the activated line, the stop line is determined. The configuration may be changed. However, in this case, it is necessary to specify a symbol stopped and displayed on each activated line, and execute the determination process on each of the lines L1 to L5. In this regard, the present embodiment is superior from the viewpoint of processing load because only the process of referring to the table is required.

  The stop line to be changed is arbitrary as long as the combination of the big hit symbols is not stopped and displayed on the activated line. Further, the present invention is not limited to the change of the stop line, and may be configured to change the symbols constituting the reach symbol. However, the configuration in which the reach line is changed is superior in that the suspension notice corresponding to the design for the notice is easily executed.

  (7) In each of the above embodiments, in the normal reach display, the stop result is determined according to the variable display time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the variable display in the case of complete departure, the variable display is performed. The stop result may be determined according to the time. In short, the present invention can be applied to a variable display in which a stop result is set according to a variable display time.

  (8) In each of the above embodiments, in the normal reach variable display, the variable display time is determined by the main control device 81, and the display mode corresponding to the determined variable display time is determined. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display mode may be directly determined. Thus, the display mode is not affected by the variable display time. In such a case, when the display mode is determined, it may be set so as to determine the display mode corresponding to the suspension notice. However, this embodiment is superior from the viewpoint of reducing the processing load and the amount of storage to be stored in advance.

  (9) In each of the above-described embodiments, the reach display is set so that the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by the notice symbol is set within the range in which the variable display time does not need to be changed. The present invention is not limited to this, and in the reach display, the execution of the suspension notice may be uniformly restricted. However, this embodiment is superior from the viewpoint of the execution frequency of the suspension notice.

  (10) In each of the above embodiments, the reserved number is not limited to the configuration of four, and may be three or five or more each.

  (11) The method of measuring each time in each of the above embodiments is arbitrary, and the method of counting a predetermined value using the counter area may be an addition type or a subtraction type. Further, the manner of monitoring the power failure in the main control device 81 or the like is also arbitrary. In the first embodiment, the number of rounds in each open / close execution mode is arbitrary.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration of providing the game ball for winning the game ball to the variable winning device 32 or the like is not limited to the configuration of directly paying out the game ball, and the function of storing the virtual game medium. In a configuration having the virtual game medium, the virtual game medium may be provided.

  In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 41 may not be provided, and a result of a lottery such as a winning / losing lottery may be taught by a movable decorative member.

  Also, in each of the above-described embodiments, as the support mode of the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower working port 34, instead of the low frequency support mode, a support disable mode in which the electric accessory 34a does not enter the open state is set. Is also good. Further, even when the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state, a configuration may be such that a winning of a game ball to the lower operating port 34 can occur.

  (12) In each of the above embodiments, the lower operating port 34 is provided with the electric accessory 34a, and the ease of winning a game ball to the lower operating port 34 varies according to the gaming state. However, this may be changed. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the electric accessory 34a of the lower operation port 34 is not provided, and the easiness of winning a game ball to the lower operation port 34 does not change according to the game state.

  (13) In each of the above embodiments, the transition between the high probability mode and the low probability mode in the winning / rejecting lottery mode is performed when the probability variable jackpot result or the normal jackpot result occurs. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the mode shifts to the low-probability mode when a predetermined number of game times are consumed in the high-probability mode. In addition, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a transition to the high probability mode is made when a predetermined number of game times are exhausted in the low probability mode.

  In addition, when a lottery opportunity different from the jackpot lottery is established, a shift lottery in the winning / rejecting lottery mode is performed, and if a promotion win is made in the shift lottery, the mode changes from the low probability mode to the high probability mode, and the falling lottery in the shift lottery is performed. The configuration may change from the high probability mode to the low probability mode when.

  (14) In each of the above embodiments, the distribution table is set so that the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that results in the probability change jackpot is duplicated in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. The distribution table may be set so that the value of the jackpot type counter C2 as a result and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 as a normal jackpot result do not overlap between the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. The distribution table may be set so that the value of the jackpot type counter C2 which becomes the normal jackpot type and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 which becomes the normal jackpot result do not overlap in the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

  (15) In each of the above-described embodiments, when information indicating that the suspension notice is to be executed is set (specifically, when the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored), the suspension notice is provided at the start of each game round. Is carried out to determine whether or not to execute, and the hold notice is executed in the game times that have been won in the lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the reservation notice is always performed in each of the game rounds until the game round is performed on the hold information related to the setting to execute the hold advance notice. In this case, the continuity of the reservation notice can be enhanced in a case where the situation in which the information for executing the reservation notice is set is continued over a plurality of game times. However, the configuration of each of the above embodiments is superior in that the player does not feel uncomfortable when the reservation notice is restricted.

  (16) In the above embodiments, the display control device 212 determines the type of the symbol as the stop result. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The main controller 81 determines the type of the symbol as the stop result. It may be configured to be determined. In this case, the main controller 81 determines whether or not to perform the suspension notice, and when the conditions for performing the suspension notice are satisfied, the main controller 81 determines the mode of the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice. May be determined. Further, in the case of changing to the suspension result for the suspension notice in the middle of the game round, the main control device 81 may determine the variable display pattern for making the change.

  (17) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information corresponding to the out-of-reach can be a trigger for the execution of the advance notice. However, the hold information corresponding to the out-of-reach does not serve as the opportunity of the execution of the advance notice. Only the hold information corresponding to the winning may be configured to be a trigger for execution of the hold notice. In this case, for the player, when the occurrence of the reservation notice is confirmed, it is possible to know that the jackpot win will occur in the subsequent game round.

  (18) The form of the stop result in performing the suspension notice is not limited to the form in each of the above embodiments as long as the player can recognize that the suspension notice is made. For example, the mode of the suspension result for the reservation notice may be a mode in which a combination of symbols is established in ascending or descending order of numbers on one activated line, and a combination of predetermined symbols instead of the same symbol is one activated line. It is good also as an aspect established above.

  (19) In each of the above embodiments, when the main control device 81 determines in the confirmation processing for reservation advance notice (FIG. 13) whether or not the suspension information corresponds to the jackpot winning, it is set as the jackpot winning. It may be configured to refer to only a part of the numerical information as the transfer information. In the low probability mode, all the pieces of transition information are referred to, but in the high probability mode, only a part of the pieces of transition information may be referred to. In this case, in the configuration in which the suspension notice is executed, the time required for one processing of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) in the main control device 81 is reduced, and the activation cycle of the timer interrupt processing is set to be shorter than before. Even if the timer interrupt process is not secured for a long time, it is possible to sufficiently prevent the timer interrupt process from being newly activated in a situation where one timer interrupt process is being executed. Further, the main control device 81 executes a process for executing various processes for starting a game session, in contrast to the normal process (FIG. 16) for executing a process for executing a reservation announcement (FIG. 13). Even if the timer interrupt process interrupts, it is possible to prevent the time required for completing the normal process of the process from being unnecessarily long.

  By the way, in the present configuration, when the hold command corresponding to the jackpot winning is transmitted from the main control device 81 in a state where the hold information which is the trigger of the execution of the hold notice is not stored, the hold notice is always executed. A configuration may be made to the effect. Even in this case, as described above, in the configuration for referencing only part of the transition information set as the jackpot in the confirmation processing for the hold announcement, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored, Is set to execute the suspension notice at a predetermined probability.

  (20) In each of the above embodiments, the main controller 81 determines whether or not to perform the suspension notice, and the suspension command is transmitted from the main controller 81 only when the decision to perform the suspension notice is made. May be adopted. In the present configuration, even if new hold information is stored in a situation where it is already set to perform hold advance notice, a process for preventing a setting for performing a new hold advance notice for the hold information is performed. The configuration may be such that the main control device 81 performs the processing instead of the display control device 212. More specifically, the main control device 81 has a processing configuration related to the notification condition satisfaction flag and the hold notification counter area 327 in each of the above embodiments.

  (21) In each of the above embodiments, in a situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored on hold, even if new hold information is newly stored, the setting for performing the hold advance notice is not performed on the hold information. The processing to be performed may be performed by the main control device 81 instead of the display control device 212. Specifically, the main controller 81 may determine whether or not the winning information is included in the hold information, and may not transmit the hold command when the winning information is included.

  (22) In each of the above-described embodiments, when new hold information is stored in a situation in which hold advance notification has already been set, a setting to perform hold advance notice for the hold information can be made. It may be. In this case, in a situation where a plurality of the hold information that is the trigger of the execution of the hold notice is stored at the same time, if a jackpot result is obtained in the game times related to the hold information that was first started, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the setting to execute the hold notice set for the hold information to be started later is deleted. The timing for erasing the setting to execute the suspension notice is the timing when the game round resulting in the jackpot ends, the timing when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is started, and the case where the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is performed. May be either the timing at which the opening effect is performed or the timing at which the open / close execution mode ends. With this configuration, it is possible to initialize the setting to execute the hold notice, which has been set, up to the moment when the jackpot result occurs.

  Further, in the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is held and stored, when the hold information is newly stored, a determination may be made that the hold advance notice is given to the hold information. In this case, in the situation where the hold information that is the trigger of the execution of the hold notice is stored, if a jackpot result is obtained in the game round related to the hold information that was started earlier than the hold information, May be configured to delete the setting for executing the hold notice that has already been set. The timing for erasing the setting to execute the suspension notice is the timing when the game round resulting in the jackpot ends, the timing when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is started, and the case where the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is performed. May be either the timing at which the opening effect is performed or the timing at which the open / close execution mode ends. With this configuration, it is possible to initialize the setting to execute the hold notice, which has been set, up to the moment when the jackpot result occurs.

  (23) In each of the above embodiments, the effective line is not limited to a straight line, and may be set as a line having a bend. Also, the design is not limited to the above embodiments, but is arbitrary.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a state corresponding to the probability change jackpot result is set as a relatively advantageous predetermined game state, and a state corresponding to a normal jackpot result is set as a relatively disadvantageous predetermined game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a relatively advantageous predetermined game state and a disadvantageous predetermined game state may be set according to a difference in the number of games in which the high-frequency support mode is continued in the electric accessory 34a after the opening / closing execution mode. . Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a relatively advantageous predetermined game state and a disadvantageous predetermined game state are set depending on a difference in the number of games in which the high probability mode is continued after the open / close execution mode. In addition, a relatively advantageous predetermined gaming state and a disadvantageous predetermined gaming state may be set depending on whether or not the electric accessory 34a enters the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode.

  (24) The hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 are separately stored, and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 is given priority. A configuration in which digestion may be performed may be applied, and conversely, a configuration in which suspension information related to winning in the upper working port 33 is preferentially digested may be applied. In this case, of the hold information obtained based on the winning in the upper working port 33 and the hold information obtained based on the winning in the lower working port 34, the former hold information is set as a trigger of the execution of the hold notice. A configuration may also be obtained, or the latter suspension information may be set as a trigger for execution of the suspension notice.

  Further, in the above-described configuration, the plurality of operating ports are not vertically arranged side by side, but the first operating port corresponding to the upper operating port 33 and the second operating port corresponding to the lower operating port 34 are horizontally arranged. A configuration in which the two working ports are arranged side by side may be adopted. Furthermore, according to the operation mode of the firing handle 54, the two operation ports may be arranged apart from each other so that only the first operation port or the second operation port can be won. In this case, it is possible for the player to aim at only one of the first operating port and the second operating port according to the reservation notice.

  Further, in the above configuration, the main display unit 43 displays a first display area for displaying the result of the determination as to whether or not the hold information obtained based on the winning in the upper operating port 33 and the first display area based on the winning in the lower operating port 34. And a second display area for displaying a result of the determination of the validity of the held information. In this case, the change information of the pattern is displayed in the first display area prior to or based on the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning in the upper operating port 33 becomes the target of the success / failure determination. Is started and the stop result corresponding to the determination of success or failure is displayed, and the fluctuation display of one game time is ended. In addition, the change display of the pattern in the second display area is performed before the hold information acquired based on the winning in the lower operation port 34 becomes the target of the hit determination or based on the hit determination. When the game is started, the stop result corresponding to the determination is displayed, and the variation display of one game time is ended.

  (25) In the case where the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 is a target of the hit determination, and the case where the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 is the target of the hit determination, May be different from each other. For example, in a configuration in which the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 is preferentially consumed as in the above (24), the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 is a target of the hit / fail determination. In this case, the configuration may be more advantageous for the player than when the execution of the hit determination is not prioritized and the hold information related to winning in the operating port 33 is the target of the hit determination.

  (26) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information is acquired based on the winning of the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which the hold information is acquired based on the operation of the start lever. In short, the condition for acquiring the hold information is arbitrary.

  (27) In each of the above embodiments, the main control unit 81 is configured to start one game round on the main display unit 43 based on the determination of success or failure. However, the present invention is not limited to this. No, based on the fact that when the condition for making a decision on the success or failure of the main control device 81 is satisfied, the above-mentioned game play is started at a timing before the timing at which the decision on the success or failure is actually made, and thereafter, the decision on the success or failure is made. The subsequent variable display pattern, variable display time, and stop result in the game round may be determined. In this case, the main control device 81 transmits a variation command first when the timing of starting the game is reached, and then determines whether or not it is correct, determines a variation display time, and determines a type. The type command may be transmitted, and the transmission timings of the variable time command and the type command may be shifted. However, the timing at which the variation time command and the type command are transmitted needs to be the timing until the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 is switched from high-speed variation to low-speed variation.

  (28) In the above embodiments, the display control device 212 is controlled by the sound lamp control device 82 based on the command output from the main control device 81. The display control device 212 may control the sound lamp control device 82 based on a command output from the control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 are separately provided, a configuration in which both the control devices 82 and 212 are provided as one sub-side control device may be adopted. In each of the embodiments except the second embodiment, the function of the audio lamp control device 82 or the display control device 212 may be integrated in the main control device 81. The function of both the display control device 212 and the display control device 212 may be integrated in the main control device 81.

  (29) The notification means that the hold notice is given is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the notice device for holding the notice is given on a display screen of a display device provided separately from the symbol display device 41. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the suspension notice is performed by setting the decorative member movably provided in a predetermined notice mode, or a configuration in which the suspension notice is performed by lighting a predetermined light emitting unit. A configuration may be adopted in which a preliminary announcement is made by outputting a sound from a unit, or a configuration in which a preliminary announcement is made by a combination of all or some of the above-described embodiments.

  In this case, the execution of the suspension notice may be restricted according to the operation mode corresponding to the acquired suspension information. For example, in a configuration in which the suspension notice is performed by outputting a sound from the speaker unit, if the audio output time corresponding to the acquired suspension information is shorter than the audio output time corresponding to the suspension notice, the suspension information is output. In some cases, a sound corresponding to the suspension notice is output even though the corresponding various operations have been completed. In this case, the harmony between the audio output time and the various operation times is impaired, giving a sense of incongruity to the player and possibly affecting the operation of the later game. On the other hand, by restricting the execution of the suspension notice according to the operation mode corresponding to the acquired suspension information, it is possible to achieve harmony between the operation mode corresponding to the suspension information and the operation mode of the suspension notice. it can.

  (30) In the above embodiments, the stop line is determined, and the stop result is determined by determining the symbol stopped and displayed on the stop line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the left line L1 Alternatively, the stop result may be determined by determining a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to omit the stop line determination processing.

  (31) In each of the above embodiments, when a reach display occurs in a game time before the game time related to the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice, the hold notice is executed. The present invention is not limited to this.For example, if a reach display occurs in a game time prior to the game time related to the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice, a fluctuation display that does not correspond to the hold notice is displayed in the game time. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the execution of the suspension notice is not performed until the game times related to the suspension information that triggered the execution of the suspension notice. Specifically, when a reach display occurs, a configuration may be adopted in which processing for deleting a notice condition satisfaction flag is executed.

  (32) In each of the above-described embodiments, the stop result is not changed when the hold notice condition is satisfied during the fluctuation display in which the reach occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the conditions of the suspension notice are satisfied during the suspension, control may be performed so as to obtain a stop result corresponding to the suspension notice. Specifically, in the game time in which the reach occurs, when the condition of the suspension notice is satisfied while all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed at the high-speed fluctuation display, the symbols are displayed so that the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice is obtained. It is good to carry out replacement processing. This makes it possible to further increase the execution frequency of the suspension notice.

  Also, even when the fluctuation display in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped, when the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the stop result of the upper symbol row Z1, and It is preferable to execute a process of replacing the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 based on the symbols for the announcement so as to obtain a stop result corresponding to the announcement for the hold.

  (33) In the third embodiment, the hold notice using the same symbol as the notice symbol is executed as the hold notice corresponding to the notice symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second embodiment As in the form of the above, when the design for the notice is a specific design, the stop result corresponding to the reservation notice by the specific design is made, whereas when the design for the notice is a non-specific design, the stop result corresponds to the reservation notice by the non-specific design The configuration may be such that a stop result is obtained. In short, as a pre-stage of the process of setting the stop result for the off-normal reach corresponding to the reservation notice, it is determined whether or not the reservation notice corresponding to the notice symbol can be executed without changing the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. Processing may be provided.

  Further, in the third embodiment, when the suspension notice corresponding to the symbol for notice can be executed without changing the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 and the notice symbol are changed. Although the stop line information and the combination information of the symbols are uniquely determined from the type information, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration for executing the processing described in the first embodiment or the second embodiment is adopted. It may be. In this case, various stop results can be displayed. However, this embodiment is superior from the viewpoint of reducing the processing load.

  (34) In the fourth embodiment, when all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are changing at a high speed, the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the notice symbol stops in the middle symbol column Z2. Alternatively, the determination may be made after execution of the process of grasping the stop result of the middle symbol sequence Z2.

  In this case, in place of the processing of steps S3113 and S3114, it is determined whether or not the symbol for notice is stopped in the upper symbol row Z1, and if it is determined that the symbol for notice is not stopped in the upper symbol row Z1. While this processing is terminated as it is, if it is determined that the notice symbol is stopped in the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row stop result correction processing may be executed. Also in this case, the same effect as in the fourth embodiment can be obtained.

  In such a configuration, if the symbol for notice does not stop in the middle symbol row Z2, a hold notice execution restriction flag is set, and after execution of the process of step S3103, it is determined whether or not the hold notice execution restriction flag is stored. The determination may be made, and if the flag is stored, the present processing may be ended, and the suspension notice execution restriction flag may be deleted by the fluctuation end processing. Thereby, in the normal reach display, when the suspension notice by the symbol for the notice cannot be executed without changing the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the process of grasping the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 and the notice on the middle symbol row Z2 are performed. It is suppressed that the determination process of whether or not the symbol is stopped is performed repeatedly, and the processing load can be reduced.

  (35) In the fourth embodiment, in the reach-response processing, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 (if the high-speed fluctuation display of the upper symbol row Z1 has ended, the upper symbol row is additionally provided. In the case where the suspension notice using the same symbol as the preliminary notice can be executed without changing the stop result of the column Z1), the suspension advance notice is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case where the design for notice is a specific design as in the embodiment described above, the execution of the reservation advance notice with the specific design is performed, whereas, when the design for the advance notice is a non-specific design, the execution of the reservation advance notice with the non-specific design is executed. It may be configured.

  In the above configuration, in a situation where all the symbol columns are changing at high speed, the execution condition of the reservation notice is satisfied, and the notice symbol related to the reservation notice is a non-specific symbol, and stops at the middle symbol column Z2. If there is no non-specific symbol to be displayed, instead of displaying a preset stop result, the stop result may be modified so as not to be a stop result corresponding to the suspension notice. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach symbol is included in the symbols stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, and it is determined that the reach symbol is included in the symbols stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. In this case, a process of changing the reach symbol to a symbol that is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 may be executed. Thus, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play a game that can be caused by the execution of the reservation advance notice with a specific symbol, even though the stoppage of the game times related to the reservation advance notice is a normal jackpot.

  (36) In the third embodiment, in the change table referred to in step S2903, the combination of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed, and the stop corresponding to the suspension notice by the symbol other than the notice symbol is performed. The case where the result is displayed and the configuration in which is set as a change target are set as the change targets.However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the case where the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by a design other than the design for the preview is displayed from the change target The configuration may be excluded. In this case, in the changing process executed in step S2905, only the process of changing the reach line is required, and the process of changing the reach pattern is not required. Thereby, the configuration can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

  (37) In the fourth embodiment, the correction stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is set in the lower symbol row stop result correction table so that the combination of the big hit symbols is not stopped and displayed. In this case, the reach symbol and the reach line are uniquely determined based on the type of the notice symbol, the stop result of the upper symbol column Z1 and the middle symbol column Z2. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The reach symbol may be changed to a symbol corresponding to the reservation notice without changing the reach line determined by the above. In this case, it is determined whether or not the combination of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed by the change of the reach symbol, or whether or not the stop result corresponding to the holding advance notice by the symbol other than the symbol for the announcement is displayed, and when applicable. , The reach line may be changed. However, the fourth embodiment is superior from the viewpoint of reducing the processing load.

  (38) Other types of pachinko machines, such as pachinko machines, which are different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines that generate a right when a ball enters and become a jackpot, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arrangement ball machines, sparrow balls and the like.

(39) If the characteristic configuration of the first to fourth embodiments or the configuration of the other embodiment has an effect that the attention to the game can be satisfactorily enhanced, Any combination may be applied to each other.
<About the inventions extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses or the like.
In addition, the invention described in each of the following feature groups is described as "a game machine such as a pachinko game machine , for example, has a jackpot game when a game ball enters a starting ball provided in a game area. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined game state such as a state, etc. In addition, for example, in a display device provided in a game area, a variable display of a pattern is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed. In the final stop display of the variable display, a display effect for one game is executed in which a stop result according to the lottery result is displayed, and when the lottery result is a transition to a so-called jackpot game state, For example, after a display effect for one game is executed, for example, the opening and closing of the variable ball-entering device provided in the game area is executed, and the payout of the game balls according to the number of balls entering the variable ball-in device is performed. Be executed In addition, when the game ball enters the starting ball entry section while the display of the pattern is being changed, the information used for the winning lottery is held and stored up to a predetermined number (for example, four). In the case of a pachinko game machine, if the hold is stored, after the change display of the pattern is completed, a winning lottery is performed using the information stored and held, and the next change display of the pattern is performed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853) The game in the gaming machine having the above configuration includes a game in which a game ball is fired so that a ball enters the starting ball unit and a starting ball unit. In the case of a ball entering the game, the lottery result is checked to see if it is a hit or not, and for the former game, entering the starting ball entry section until the upper limit of the hold memory is reached Whether or not a sphere occurs With techniques shall be noted, with respect to the latter game, aspects of the pattern of the varying display, the player migration winning in whether or not likely to become stopped results corresponding to the jackpot gaming state interest. "That Regarding the background art, " Here, in a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by diversifying the game. In order to diversify the game, the game ball is used as described above. In the game of firing, a method of diversifying the manner in which the game balls flow down in the game area is conceivable, and in the game of checking whether or not the lottery result has been won at each game time as described above, at each game time However, since the size of the game area is limited in the former case, there is a limit to diversifying the game. Even diversified display patterns of each game once the latter, there is also a limit in terms of increasing the degree of attention to the game. The invention has been made with the problem to be solved.

Feature A1. An information acquisition unit (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (reservation area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers up to a predetermined number defined as an upper limit;
When a determination is made as to whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to predetermined addition information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit A determination unit (a function of executing a success / failure determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for sequentially performing the determination on the plurality of pieces of special information;
Privilege granting means (main control) for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81);
Prior to the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means or based on the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means, a game replay operation is started, and corresponds to the determination result of the provision determination means. The end of the gaming operation as a notification result is set as one of the gaming operations, and the gaming operation of each gaming operation is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means (a function of executing a change start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, and a function of executing a change display control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means determines, in each game time, mode information corresponding to an operation mode when the game round operation is performed based on the result of the determination of the provision, and determines mode information (display control device 212). Of the MPU 252), and when the game operation is performed for each game, the game operation is performed in an operation mode according to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means. Is performed.
The information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the assignment determination is the information before the predetermined special information is targeted for the assignment determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at the timing (a function of executing a confirmation process for suspension notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
The special information corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying means with respect to the predetermined special information is the special information which has been subjected to the assignment determination before the predetermined special information specified by the destination specifying means. The special notification control means (the stop result setting corresponding to the suspension notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) to be executed by the predetermined notification means or the notification means different from the predetermined notification means in the situation where the game round according to Function to execute processing and function to execute processing during fluctuation),
In accordance with the aspect information determined by the aspect information determining means, the special notification restricting means (not to execute the special notification, or to limit the execution mode) (a suspension for the off-normal reach corresponding to the suspension notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212). Function to execute the result setting process),
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature A1, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit and not subject to the addition determination is performed at a timing before the special information becomes the target of the addition determination. May be executed. Thereby, for the player, not only the game for confirming the acquisition determination result of the acquired special information, but also when the plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit, the order of the determination of the addition is determined. For the later special information, a game for confirming or predicting the result of the case of being subjected to the grant determination according to the content of the special notification is added, thereby diversifying the game. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In such a configuration, when the game round operation time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determination means is different from the game round operation time corresponding to the special notification, for example, the game round operation time corresponding to the special notification If the game time is changed to, the game round operation time fluctuates with the execution of the special notification. Therefore, there is a possibility that a difference occurs in the digestion rate of the game round per unit time depending on the game hall. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to execute the special notification without changing the game round operation time, an unnatural state may occur, and the player may feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, the execution of the special notification or the execution mode thereof is restricted according to the mode information determined by the mode information determination means, thereby increasing the degree of interest in the game while suppressing the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience. It becomes possible.

  As described above, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A2. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting ball entry portion (upper working port 33, lower working port 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the starting ball entry section;
Acquisition information storage means (reservation area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers up to a predetermined number defined as an upper limit;
When a determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to predetermined addition information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit A determination unit (a function of executing a success / failure determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for sequentially performing the determination on the plurality of pieces of special information;
Privilege granting means (main control) for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81);
A game turn-around operation is started prior to the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means or based on the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means, and a notification corresponding to the result of the provision determination is provided. As a result, the end of the game repetition operation is defined as one of the game repetitions, and a predetermined time is set so that the game repetition operation of each game repetition is performed according to the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means. Game time control means (a function of executing the fluctuation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and a function of executing the fluctuation display control processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for controlling the notification means of
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means determines, in each game time, mode information corresponding to an operation mode when the game round operation is performed based on the result of the determination of the provision, and determines mode information (display control device 212). Of the MPU 252), and when the game operation is performed for each game, the game operation is performed in an operation mode according to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means. Is performed.
The information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the assignment determination is the information before the predetermined special information is targeted for the assignment determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at the timing (a function of executing a confirmation process for suspension notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
The special information corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying means with respect to the predetermined special information is the special information which has been subjected to the assignment determination before the predetermined special information specified by the destination specifying means. The special notification control means (the function of executing the stop result setting process corresponding to the suspension notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 and the special notification control means to be executed by the predetermined Function to execute the process during fluctuation),
In accordance with the aspect information determined by the aspect information determining means, the special notification restricting means (not to execute the special notification, or to limit the execution mode) (a suspension for the off-normal reach corresponding to the suspension notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212). Function to execute the result setting process),
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature A2, the special notification according to the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit and not subject to the addition determination is performed at a timing before the special information becomes the target of the addition determination. May be executed. Thereby, for the player, not only the game for generating the entry of the game ball into the starting entry section and the game for confirming the result of the determination of the addition of the special information acquired based on the entry, a plurality of special When the information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result of the case where the information becomes the object of the assignment determination is confirmed or predicted according to the content of the special notification for the special information whose order of the object of the assignment determination is later. A game to play is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In addition, the player knows the determination result of each game round by using a predetermined notification unit. The mode information corresponding to the operation mode of the notifying unit is determined by the mode information determining unit based on the assignment determination result. Then, the special notification is executed by the predetermined notification means. As a result, if the player tries to grasp the grant determination result of each game round, the special notification can be naturally checked, and even though the special notification has been performed, it can be overlooked. Is suppressed.

  In such a configuration, according to the mode information determined by the mode information determining unit, the special notification is not executed or the execution mode is restricted. When the operation mode according to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means is different from the mode corresponding to the special notification, the game round operation time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means and the game of the special notification It is assumed that the re-use operation time is different. In this case, for example, in the case of changing the operation time for game replay to execute the special notification, the operation time for game replay changes with the execution of the special notification. There is a possibility that a difference may occur in the digestibility of the rice. On the other hand, for example, if an attempt is made to execute the special notification without changing the operation time for playing a game, an unnatural state may occur, and the player may feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, the execution of the special notification or the execution mode thereof is restricted according to the mode information determined by the mode information determination unit as described above, so that the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above is suppressed and It is possible to increase the degree.

  As described above, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A3. A picture display means for variably displaying pictures on a display screen (display screen G);
Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting ball entry portion (upper working port 33, lower working port 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the starting ball entry section;
Acquisition information storage means (reservation area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers up to a predetermined number defined as an upper limit;
When a transition determination is made as to whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to predetermined transition information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit A transfer determination unit (a function of executing a success / failure determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for sequentially performing the transfer determination on the plurality of pieces of special information;
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means being a shift corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the shift information. State shifting means (a function of executing a game state shifting process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81);
Prior to the transition determination being performed by the transition determination unit or based on the transition determination being performed by the transition determination unit, a variation display of the pattern is started in the pattern display unit, and the determination of the transition determination is performed. Displaying the notification result corresponding to the result and terminating the variation display of the pattern as one of the game times, and displaying the variation of the pattern of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means. Game time control means (a function of executing a change start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and a function of executing a change display control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) so as to perform the pattern display means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means determines, in each game time, mode information corresponding to a display mode in the case of performing the variable display of the pattern based on the result of the shift determination (mode control unit 212). Of the MPU 252, the display mode according to the aspect information determined by the aspect information determining means is displayed on the display screen when the variation display of the pattern for each game is performed. And
The information reflecting the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the obtained information storage unit is the target of the shift determination is information before the predetermined special information is the target of the transfer determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at the timing (a function of executing a confirmation process for a reservation notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
The display mode of the game times related to the special information targeted for the shift determination before the predetermined special information targeted by the destination specifying means is specified by the destination specifying means for the predetermined special information. Special notification control means for performing special notification by setting a special mode corresponding to the received information (executing the function for executing the stop result setting process corresponding to the suspension notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 and the process during fluctuation) Function) and
In accordance with the variable display time corresponding to the aspect information determined by the aspect information determining means, a special notification restricting means (notifying the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 that the special notification is not executed or restricts the execution mode. Function to execute the normal reach stop result setting process corresponding to
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature A3, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit and not subject to the transition determination is performed at a timing before the special information is subject to the transition determination. May be executed. Accordingly, for the player, not only the game for generating the ball entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry unit and the game for confirming the transition determination result of the special information acquired based on the ball entry, a plurality of special If the information is stored in the acquired information storage means, for the special information whose order of transition is determined later, the result when the target of transition determination is confirmed or predicted according to the content of the special notification. A game to play is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In addition, the player recognizes the shift determination result of each game round by visually recognizing the display mode of the pattern on the pattern display means. The mode information according to the display mode of the picture is determined by the mode information determining means based on the shift determination result. Then, the display mode of the game times related to the special information targeted for the transition determination before the predetermined special information is targeted for the transition determination becomes a special mode corresponding to the content of the predetermined special information, Special announcements are made. Thereby, if the player is paying attention to the display screen of the picture display means in order to grasp the transition determination result of each game round, the special notification can be naturally confirmed, and despite the special notification being performed, It is suppressed that it is overlooked.

  In such a configuration, the execution of the special notification is restricted according to the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining unit. When the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining unit is different from the variable display time corresponding to the special mode, for example, when the variable display time is changed to display the special mode Since the variable display time fluctuates with the execution of the special notification, there is a possibility that a difference occurs in the digestion rate of the game times per unit time depending on the game hall. On the other hand, for example, in the case where the special mode is displayed without changing the variable display time, the display mode becomes unnatural, and the player may feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, the execution of the special notification or the execution mode thereof is limited in accordance with the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determination unit as described above, so that the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience is prevented. It is possible to increase the degree of interest in the game while suppressing the game.

  As described above, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A4. A picture display means for variably displaying pictures on a display screen (display screen G);
Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting ball entry portion (upper working port 33, lower working port 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the starting ball entry section;
Acquisition information storage means (reservation area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers up to a predetermined number defined as an upper limit;
When a transition determination is made as to whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to predetermined transition information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit A transfer determination unit (a function of executing a success / failure determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for sequentially performing the transfer determination on the plurality of pieces of special information;
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means being a shift corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the shift information. State shifting means (a function of executing a game state shifting process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81);
Prior to the transition determination being performed by the transition determination unit or based on the transition determination being performed by the transition determination unit, a variation display of the pattern is started in the pattern display unit, and the determination of the transition determination is performed. Displaying the notification result corresponding to the result and terminating the variation display of the pattern as one of the game times, and displaying the variation of the pattern of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means. Game time control means (a function of executing a change start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and a function of executing a change display control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) so as to perform the pattern display means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means, in each game time, a variable display time determining means (in the MPU 252 of the display controller 212, (A function of executing a variation start process), and when a variation display of the pattern of each game is performed, a display mode corresponding to the variation display time determined by the variation display time determination means is displayed on the display screen. Things,
The information reflecting the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the obtained information storage unit is the target of the shift determination is information before the predetermined special information is the target of the transfer determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at the timing (a function of executing a confirmation process for a reservation notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
The display mode of the game times related to the special information targeted for the shift determination before the predetermined special information targeted by the destination specifying means is specified by the destination specifying means for the predetermined special information. Special notification control means for performing special notification by setting a special mode corresponding to the received information (executing the function for executing the stop result setting process corresponding to the suspension notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 and the process during fluctuation) Function) and
In accordance with the variable display time determined by the variable display time determination means, special notification restriction means for preventing the execution of the special notification or restricting the execution mode thereof (a deviation corresponding to the suspension notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212). Function to execute the stop result setting process for normal reach) and
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature A4, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit and not subject to the transition determination is performed at a timing before the special information is subject to the transition determination. May be executed. Accordingly, for the player, not only the game for generating the ball entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry unit and the game for confirming the transition determination result of the special information acquired based on the ball entry, a plurality of special If the information is stored in the acquired information storage means, for the special information whose order of transition is determined later, the result when the target of transition determination is confirmed or predicted according to the content of the special notification. A game to play is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In addition, the player recognizes the shift determination result of each game round by visually recognizing the display mode of the pattern on the pattern display means. The display mode of the picture is determined according to the variable display time determined by the variable display time determining means. Then, the display mode of the game times related to the special information targeted for the transition determination before the predetermined special information is targeted for the transition determination becomes a special mode corresponding to the content of the predetermined special information, Special announcements are made. Thereby, if the player is paying attention to the display screen of the picture display means in order to grasp the transition determination result of each game round, the special notification can be naturally confirmed, and despite the special notification being performed, It is suppressed that it is overlooked.

  In such a configuration, the execution of the special notification or the manner of execution thereof is restricted according to the variable display time determined by the variable display time determination means. When the variable display time determined by the variable display time determining means and the variable display time corresponding to the special mode are different, for example, if the variable display time is changed to display the special mode, the special notification is executed. Therefore, there is a possibility that the difference in the digestion rate of the number of games per unit time may occur depending on the game hall. On the other hand, for example, if the special mode is displayed without changing the variable display time, the display mode becomes unnatural, and the player may feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, when it is necessary to change the variable display time determined by the variable display time determination unit as described above, the execution of the special notification is restricted, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience. , It is possible to increase the level of interest in the game.

  As described above, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature A5. The special notification restricting unit does not execute the special notification when it is necessary to change the game round operation time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining unit after the special notification is performed. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, wherein the gaming machine is limited as described above.

  According to the feature A5, when it is necessary to change the game round operation time corresponding to the aspect information determined by the aspect information determining means after performing the special notification, the execution of the special notification is limited. In this case, since it is sufficient to simply not execute the process, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing an increase in the processing load, as compared with a configuration in which a process such as correction or adjustment is performed.

Feature A6. The execution mode of the special notification is set to a plurality of types,
The special notification control means is configured to select any one of the plurality of types of execution modes and execute the special notification,
The special notification restricting means restricts, when the special notification is executed, such that a predetermined execution mode is not selected from the plurality of types of execution modes according to the mode information determined by the mode information determining module. The gaming machine according to feature A1, feature A2, or feature A5, wherein the gaming machine is a game machine.

  According to the feature A6, a plurality of types of execution modes of the special notification are set, and the special notification is executed in any one of the plurality of types of execution modes. Here, a restriction is made so that a predetermined execution mode is not selected from a plurality of types of execution modes. Thereby, it is possible to satisfactorily execute the special notification according to the determined mode information, for example.

Feature A7. The predetermined notifying means is a picture display means for variably displaying a picture on a display screen (display screen G),
The game number control means starts the variable display of the picture in the picture display means before the giving judgment is made by the giving judgment means or based on the giving judgment made by the giving judgment means. The stop result corresponding to the determination result of the giving determination is displayed, and the end of the change display of the pattern is set as one of the game times, according to the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit. It is to make the fluctuation display of the pattern of the game times,
Notification execution determining means (MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for determining whether to perform the special notification on the special information targeted by the destination specifying means based on the specification by the destination specifying means. To execute step S1601, etc.)
If the notification execution determination means has made a decision to perform the special notification, the special information targeted for the determination becomes a trigger for the execution of the special notification,
The special notification control unit is configured to execute the special notification based on a result of stopping the game round related to the special information targeted for the provision of the special information before the special information set as the execution of the special notification. The special notification is performed by making a special mode corresponding to the content of the special information set as
The special notification restricting unit is configured to, if the stop result cannot be changed to the special mode without changing the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining unit, the stop result is set to the special mode. The gaming machine according to feature A5 or feature A6, wherein the gaming machine is limited so as not to be in an aspect.

  According to the feature A7, since the special notification is performed in the form of the stop result in each game round, the timing at which the special notification is performed becomes clear to the player, and the possibility of missing the special notification is reduced.

  Here, the stop result corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining unit is displayed at the elapse timing of the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining unit. In the configuration for performing the special notification, the stop result of the special mode may not be stopped depending on the elapse timing of the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining unit. In such a case, if the variable display time is changed in order to display the special mode, the variable display time is changed by the special notification. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the stop result is changed to the special mode without changing the variable display time, the player may feel uncomfortable when the mode is changed, and the processing may be complicated. On the other hand, according to the present feature, when the variable display time needs to be changed in order to change the mode of the stop result to the special mode, the execution of the display of the special mode is restricted. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of interest in the game while suppressing the occurrence of the inconvenience.

Feature A8. The pattern display means is configured to variably display a pattern in each of a plurality of variable display areas (symbol rows Z1 to Z3) on the display screen, as the variable display of the pattern.
A stop result of at least a specific variable display area, which is a part of the plurality of variable display areas, is configured to correspond to a variable display time of a corresponding game time at least in a specific situation,
The special notification restricting means, when the stop result of the specific change display area in the specific situation does not correspond to the special mode according to the special information set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification, the special mode The gaming machine according to feature A7, characterized in that the gaming machine is restricted so as not to be disturbed.

  According to the feature A8, at least in the specific situation, at least the stop result of the specific variable display area is associated with the variable display time of the corresponding game, so that the storage capacity to be stored in advance is reduced. Becomes possible.

  Even in this case, the effect described in the feature A1 or the feature A2 can be achieved by restricting the execution of the special notification according to the result of stopping the specific change display area.

Feature A9. In the specific change display area, a plurality of pictures can be simultaneously stopped and displayed,
One of the plurality of patterns stopped and displayed in the specific variation display area includes a corresponding pattern corresponding to a special mode corresponding to the special information set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification. (A function of executing the processing of step S2007 or step S2308 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
The special notification control means, when it is specified that the corresponding pattern is included by the pattern specifying means, to control to be a special mode using the pattern,
The feature A8 according to feature A8, wherein the special notification restricting means restricts the special pattern from being the special mode when the pattern specifying means specifies that the corresponding pattern is not included. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A9, when the pattern specifying unit determines that the specific change display area includes the corresponding pattern corresponding to the special mode corresponding to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification. In this case, a special notification is made in a special mode using the picture.

  On the other hand, if it is specified by the pattern specifying means that the specific change display area includes the corresponding pattern corresponding to the special mode corresponding to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification, It is restricted so as not to be an embodiment. As a result, the effect described in the feature A1 or the feature A2 can be obtained while increasing the chance of executing the special notification.

  Feature A10. The special notification restriction unit is configured to determine that the plurality of symbols stopped and displayed in the specific change display area include both the corresponding symbol and a symbol different from the corresponding symbol by the symbol identification unit. The gaming machine according to Feature A9, wherein the special pattern according to the corresponding pattern is limited so as not to be the special pattern according to the different pattern.

  According to the feature A10, when it is determined that the plurality of symbols stopped and displayed in the specific change display area include both the corresponding symbol and a symbol different from the corresponding symbol by the symbol identifying unit, the pattern identifying unit stops. The result is restricted so as to be a special mode relating to the corresponding pattern while avoiding a special mode relating to a different pattern. This prevents the special mode from being displayed with different pictures. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily associate the game times related to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification with the game times at which the special notification is performed.

Feature A11. The game time control means may determine a mode of a game time stop result performed when the special information corresponding to the provided information becomes a target of the determination on one of the predetermined activated lines on the display screen. In the aspect, the combination of the assignment target patterns formed by the patterns variably displayed in the plurality of variably displayed areas is stopped and displayed,
The special notification control means, as the special aspect, the game result stop results related to the special information to be subjected to the grant determination before the special information set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification, the plurality of times, A combination formed by a pattern that is variably displayed in the variable display area, and a combination of the special notification target pattern different from the combination of the giving target pattern is stopped and displayed at a position different from the valid line or the valid line. In an embodiment,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A8 to A10, wherein the special notification restricting means restricts a combination of the special notification target patterns from being stopped and displayed.

  According to the feature A11, the combination of the symbols to be provided is stopped and displayed on the one activated line in the game time that is the provision result of the provision, so that the player can clearly understand that the provision result is the provision result. it can. In this case, the combination of the special notification target patterns is stopped and displayed at the game time when the special notification is performed, so that it is possible for the player to clearly understand that the result of the provision of the assignment is the result of the provision.

  In such a configuration, if the stop result of the specific change display area does not correspond to the combination of the special notification target patterns corresponding to the special information set as the trigger of the special notification, the combination of the special notification target patterns is displayed. Be restricted to not be. This prevents the fluctuation of the fluctuation display time due to the special notification.

Feature A12. The combination of the special notification target picture is set as a mode in which the patterns constituting the combination of the giving target picture are stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of variable display areas,
The special notification restriction unit is configured to stop and display a combination of the special notification target patterns according to the special information set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification, and to change a stop result of the specific change display area. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the combination of the special notification target patterns is restricted so as not to be stopped and displayed.

  According to the feature A12, the mode of the combination of the special notification target patterns can be made to resemble the mode of the combination of the special notification target patterns, and when the special notification target pattern combination is stopped and displayed, it corresponds to the special notification. Makes it easier for players to understand.

  In such a configuration, when the combination of the special notification target patterns is displayed, if the stop result of the specific change display area needs to be changed, the stop display of the special notification target pattern is limited. This suppresses a change in the stop result of the specific variable display area due to the special notification, and thus suppresses a change in the variable display time due to the special notification.

Feature A13. In each of the game times, based on a result of the giving determination, a variable display time determining unit that determines a variable display time when the variable display of the pattern is performed, the mode information determining unit includes the variable display time determining unit Is to determine the aspect information corresponding to the determined variable display time,
In a display mode corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means, as a pre-stage for stopping the variable display, one of a plurality of preset active lines in the display screen is displayed on one active line. The reach pattern (reach pattern) in which the combination of the assignment target patterns is likely to be established is stopped and displayed to form a reach line, and under the condition where the reach line is formed, the specific variation display area The mode in which the reach variation display is performed by the final stop display area of
At least the display mode of the game times in which the specific reach variation display is performed is such that in the final stop display area, a period from a variation start timing to a timing at which the specific reach variation display is started is a predetermined period. And the mode at the timing when the specific reach variation display is started is set to be a predetermined mode, so that the final stop display area stop result is at least a specific mode. In the game time when the reach fluctuation display is performed, it is configured to correspond to the fluctuation display time,
The special notification restricting means, when the stop result of the final stop display area does not correspond to a special notification target pattern corresponding to the special information set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification, the special notification target The gaming machine according to feature A11 or feature A12, wherein the combination is restricted so as not to be a combination of pictures.

  According to the feature A13, in the specific reach fluctuation display, the period from the fluctuation start timing to the timing at which the specific reach fluctuation display is started is a predetermined period, and the specific reach fluctuation display starts. Since the mode at the timing of the execution is a predetermined mode, the stop result of the final stop display area corresponds to the variable display time. As a result, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for displaying the pattern in a variable manner.

  In this case, if the stop result of the final stop display area is changed in order to stop and display the combination of the special notification target picture corresponding to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification, the variable display time may be changed. It becomes. On the other hand, according to this feature, in the specific reach variation display, the stop result of the final stop display area is a combination of the special notification target pattern corresponding to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification. If not, the special notification target pattern is restricted so as not to be a combination. Thereby, the change of the variable display time accompanying the execution of the special notification is suppressed.

Feature A14. As the display mode of the pattern in the variable display of the pattern, a high-identification display mode and a low-identification display mode in which the discriminability of the pattern by the appearance is relatively high and low are set,
The display mode of the game times in which the specific reach variation display is performed is such that at the timing when the specific reach variation display is started, the display mode of the picture in the final stop display area is changed from the low identification display mode to the high identification display mode. It is set to switch to the state displayed by,
The special notification restricting unit restricts the combination of the special notification target patterns so that when the combination of the special notification target patterns is stopped and the stop result of the final stop display area needs to be changed, the special notification target pattern is not changed. The gaming machine according to feature A13, wherein the gaming machine is a game machine.

  According to the feature A14, in the specific reach variation display, at the timing when the specific reach variation display is started, the pattern in the final stop display area switches from the low identification display mode to the high identification display mode. As a result, the player can check the pattern being displayed in the variable display. Here, if it is attempted to change the stop result of the final stop display area without changing the variable display time, it is necessary to change the pattern or change the speed of the variable display, which gives the player a sense of incongruity, and Will be complicated. On the other hand, according to this feature, it is necessary to change the stop result of the final stop display area when displaying the combination of the special notification target patterns according to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification. Occurs, the execution of the special notification is restricted. As a result, the above problem is avoided.

Feature A15. The special notification control means, by determining a pattern constituting a combination of special notification target picture corresponding to the special information set as an opportunity of the execution of the special notification as a reach picture, the final stop display area in the final stop display area In the situation where the pattern stopped and displayed corresponding to the variable display time constitutes the combination of the special notification target pattern, the special notification is performed,
The special notification restricting means is a combination of a special notification target pattern corresponding to the special information in which the pattern stopped and displayed in the final stop display area in association with the variable display time is set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification. The gaming machine according to feature A13 or feature A14, wherein a pattern corresponding to the fluctuating display time is stopped and displayed as it is in a situation where the pattern does not constitute pattern.

  According to the feature A15, execution of the special notification is performed in the situation where the pattern stopped and displayed in the final stop display area corresponding to the variable display time constitutes a combination of the special notification target patterns by the process of determining the reach pattern. The special notification corresponding to the special information set as an opportunity is executed. On the other hand, in a situation where the pattern stopped and displayed in response to the variable display time in the final stop display area is not a pattern constituting a combination of the special notification target patterns, the pattern corresponding to the variable display time is stopped and displayed as it is. Thereby, in the game time in which the specific reach fluctuation display is performed, the special notification corresponding to the special information set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification can be satisfactorily executed, and the fluctuation accompanying the execution of the special notification can be performed. Changes in display time are suppressed.

  Feature A16. The special notification restricting means is a combination of a special notification target pattern corresponding to the special information in which the pattern stopped and displayed in the final stop display area in association with the variable display time is set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification. The gaming machine according to Feature A15, wherein a reach pattern is displayed so that a combination of special notification target patterns using the pattern is not stopped and displayed in a situation where the pattern does not constitute the pattern.

  According to the feature A16, it is possible to execute the special notification corresponding to the special information set as the opportunity of the execution of the special notification and to set the execution of the special notification by the process of determining the reach pattern. It is possible to restrict execution of special notification that does not correspond to certain special information. Therefore, it is possible to associate the game times related to the special information that triggered the execution of the special notification with the game times in which the special notification is executed.

Feature A17. State setting means for setting a special notification state based on the result of the specification by the preceding specifying means being a predetermined result (a function of executing a setting process of a hold command in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
When the special notification state is set, a game that constitutes a combination of a special notification target pattern corresponding to the special information that triggered the setting is displayed in the special notification state in the specific reach variation display. Reach pattern determining means (function of executing step S2402 and the like in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for determining as the number of reach patterns;
With
The special notification control means is a game in which the specific reach change display is performed in the special notification state, and a pattern stopped and displayed in the final stop display area in accordance with the change display time is the current special notification. In a situation that constitutes a combination of the special notification target patterns corresponding to the state, by displaying the reach pattern determined by the reach pattern determining means, the special notification target pattern corresponding to the current special notification state is displayed. The combination is stopped and displayed.
The special notification restricting means is a game in which the specific reach fluctuation display is performed in the special notification state, and the pattern stopped and displayed in the final stop display area in accordance with the fluctuation display time is the current special notification. In a situation where the combination of the special notification target patterns corresponding to the state is not configured, the reach pattern determined by the reach pattern determining means is displayed, and the pattern corresponding to the variable display time is displayed in the final stop display area. The gaming machine according to feature A15 or feature A16, wherein the game is stopped and displayed as it is.

  According to the feature A17, when the special notification state is set, the pattern constituting the combination of the special notification target patterns is determined as the reach pattern, and in the game time in which the specific reach fluctuation display is performed in the special notification state, Regardless of whether or not the pattern that constitutes the combination of the special notification target pattern is stopped and displayed in the stop display area, by displaying the determined reach pattern, the special notification is executed or the special notification is executed. Or be restricted. This simplifies the process of determining the stop result in each game round in the special notification state.

Feature A18. In the specific reach fluctuation display, whether the pattern stopped and displayed in the final stop display area is a pattern constituting a combination of a special notification target pattern corresponding to the special information set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification. (A function of executing the steps S2007 and S2801 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
The special notification control means, a combination of a special notification target pattern corresponding to the special information that is a pattern stopped and displayed corresponding to the variable display time in the final stop display area is set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification When the pattern is determined by the pattern determining means to be a constituent pattern, the special notification is performed by displaying a pattern constituting the combination of the special notification target pattern as a reach pattern by combining with the determined pattern. And
The special notification restricting means is a combination of a special notification target pattern corresponding to the special information in which the pattern stopped and displayed in response to the variable display time in the final stop display area is set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification. When it is determined that the pattern is not a constituent pattern by the pattern determining means, the reach pattern drawn by the reach pattern drawing means is displayed, and the pattern corresponding to the variable display time is stopped and displayed in the final stop display area as it is. The gaming machine according to feature A15 or feature A16, wherein the gaming machine is a game machine.

  According to the feature A18, the pattern stopped and displayed in correspondence with the variable display time in the final stop display area forms a combination of the special notification target pattern corresponding to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification. When it is determined that the pattern is a pattern, a special notification using the pattern is executed by displaying a pattern constituting the combination of the special notification target pattern as a reach pattern by combining with the determined pattern. .

  On the other hand, when the pattern stopped and displayed in response to the variable display time in the final stop display area is not a pattern that constitutes a combination of the special notification target pattern corresponding to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification. , The execution of special notification is restricted. In this case, the pattern corresponding to the variable display time is stopped and displayed as it is in the final stop display area, and the reach pattern selected by the reach pattern lottery means is displayed. This makes it possible to suppress a change in the variable display time accompanying the execution of the special notification while making it difficult for the reach picture to be biased.

Feature A19. The apparatus further includes state setting means for setting a special notification state based on the result of the specification by the preceding specifying means being a predetermined specification result, wherein the special notification control means sets the special notification state in a state where the special notification state is set. Special announcements,
The aspect information determination means includes reach pattern lottery means for randomly selecting a type of reach pattern displayed in a game time in which the specific reach fluctuation display is performed, and the identification information is specified at least in a situation where the special notification state is not set. In the game times in which the reach fluctuation display is performed, the reach pattern of the type selected by the reach pattern lottery means is displayed, and the specific reach fluctuation display is performed.
Further, in the specific reach variation display, the pattern stopped and displayed in the final stop display area is a pattern that constitutes a combination of a special notification target pattern corresponding to the special information set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification. Pattern determining means (a function of executing the steps S2007 and S2801 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for determining whether or not
The special notification control means, a combination of a special notification target pattern corresponding to the special information that is a pattern stopped and displayed corresponding to the variable display time in the final stop display area is set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification When the pattern is determined by the pattern determining means to be a constituent pattern, the special notification is performed by displaying a pattern constituting the combination of the special notification target pattern as a reach pattern by combining with the determined pattern. And
The special notification restricting means is a combination of a special notification target pattern corresponding to the special information in which the pattern stopped and displayed in response to the variable display time in the final stop display area is set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification. When it is determined that the pattern is not a constituent pattern by the pattern determining unit, the reach pattern drawn by the reach pattern drawing unit is displayed, and the pattern corresponding to the variable display time is stopped and displayed in the final stop display area as it is. The gaming machine according to feature A15 or A16, wherein

  According to the feature A19, the pattern stopped and displayed in correspondence with the variable display time in the final stop display area forms a combination of the special notification target pattern corresponding to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification. When it is determined that the pattern is a pattern, a special notification using the pattern is executed by displaying a pattern constituting the combination of the special notification target pattern as a reach pattern by combining with the determined pattern. .

  On the other hand, when the pattern stopped and displayed in response to the variable display time in the final stop display area is not a pattern that constitutes a combination of the special notification target pattern corresponding to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification. , The execution of special notification is restricted. In this case, the pattern corresponding to the variable display time is stopped and displayed as it is in the final stop display area, and the reach pattern selected by the reach pattern lottery means is displayed. The reach pattern lottery means is used in a situation where the special notification state is not set. Thereby, as a means for randomly determining a reach picture in a situation where execution of special announcement is restricted, a reach picture lottery means for randomly determining a reach picture in a situation not in the special announcement state is also used. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration while securing the effect of the feature A18.

  Feature A20. The special notification restricting means displays the reach pattern drawn by the reach pattern lottery means, so that the combination of the special notification target patterns that do not correspond to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification is stopped and displayed. In the case where the game is described, the reach design different from the lottery reach design is displayed so that the combination of the special notification target design is not stopped and displayed, the game according to feature A18 or feature A19. Machine.

  According to the feature A20, even when a reach pattern is randomly selected by lottery, a combination of special notification target patterns that do not correspond to the special information set as a trigger for executing the special notification is stopped and displayed. , A reach pattern different from the lottery reach pattern is displayed such that the combination of the special notification target patterns is not stopped and displayed. Thereby, while securing the effect of the feature A18 or the feature A19, the game times related to the special information that triggered the execution of the special notification can be associated with the game times at which the special notification is executed.

Feature A21. An assignment information storage means (allocation table storage area 222) for storing the assignment information in advance, wherein the assignment information storage means stores the first assignment information (information of the normal jackpot result stored in the assignment table) as the assignment information ) And the second assignment information (information on the probability change jackpot result stored in the distribution table) are stored in advance,
The privilege granting means,
The game state is shifted to a first predetermined game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the assignment determination by the assignment determining means being the first assignment corresponding result that corresponds to the first assignment information. First state shifting means (a function of executing various shifting processes after the result of the normal jackpot in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
The gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the result of the giving determination by the giving determination means corresponds to the second providing information corresponding to the second providing information. Second state transition means (a function of executing various transition processing after the result of the probability change jackpot in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for transitioning to a second predetermined game state;
With
The game time control means may display the mode of a game time stop result performed when the special information corresponding to the first additional information becomes a target of the determination of the plurality of fluctuations on one activated line. With the mode in which the combination of the first addition target patterns formed by the patterns that are variably displayed in the display area is stopped and displayed, the special information corresponding to the second addition information is set as a target of the addition determination. The mode of the result of the stoppage of the game to be performed is a mode in which the combination of the second giving target patterns formed by the patterns variably displayed in the plurality of variable display areas is stopped and displayed on one activated line. And
As the combination of the special notification target patterns, a combination of the first special notification target pattern formed by the patterns forming the combination of the first addition target patterns and a pattern forming the combination of the second addition target patterns is formed. And the combination of the second special notification target patterns
The special notification restricting unit may be configured such that a combination of the special notification target patterns according to the special information set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification is a combination of the first special notification target patterns, and the final stop display area. In the above, the pattern stopped and displayed in response to the variable display time constitutes the combination of the second special notification target picture, but in the situation where it does not constitute the first special notification target picture, the special The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A20, wherein a reach pattern is displayed so that a combination of notification target patterns is not stopped and displayed.

  According to the feature A21, the combination of the special notification target patterns according to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification is the combination of the first special notification target patterns, and furthermore, the variable display time in the final stop display area. In the situation where the pattern stopped and displayed in response to the above constitutes the combination of the second special notification target patterns, but does not constitute the combination of the first special notification target patterns, the reach in which the combination of the special notification target patterns is not stopped and displayed. The picture is displayed. This restricts the stop display of the combination of the second special notification target patterns. Therefore, when the stop time is compared between the game time in which the special notification is performed and the game time that is a factor of the special notification, the combination of the special notification target patterns corresponding to the combination of the second assignment target patterns in the former is stopped and displayed. Despite being performed, the combination of the first assignment target patterns is not stopped and displayed in the latter. When such an event occurs, the player actually expects the transition to the second predetermined game state by the special notification, but actually transitions to the first predetermined game state. There is a possibility that the player's willingness to play is reduced. On the other hand, according to the present feature, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while preventing a decrease in the willingness to play.

  Further, in relation to the feature A18, "the special notification restricting means determines that the combination of the special notification target pattern according to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification is the first special notification target pattern. A combination, and the pattern stopped and displayed in the final stop display area in accordance with the variable display time is a pattern constituting a combination of the second special notification target pattern, but the first special notification target pattern When it is determined by the picture determining means that the combination of the patterns is not configured, the reach picture drawn by the reach picture lottery means is displayed, and the picture corresponding to the variable display time is stopped and displayed in the final stop display area as it is. Things ".

  Regardless of the pattern stopped in the final stop display area, a pattern that determines a combination of special notification target patterns corresponding to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification as the reach pattern is displayed. In the case where the frequency at which the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification corresponds to the first additional information and the frequency corresponding to the second additional information are different from each other, The frequency determined as the combination of the special notification target patterns corresponding to the set special information may be different between the combination of the first special notification target patterns and the combination of the second special notification target patterns. Thereby, there is a possibility that the reach pattern determined by the combination of the special notification target patterns may be biased.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the combination of the special notification target patterns according to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification is the combination of the first special notification target patterns, and furthermore, the final stop display. The pattern stopped and displayed in response to the variable display time in the region is a pattern constituting the combination of the second special notification target patterns, but has been determined by the pattern determination means not to constitute the first special notification target pattern. In this case, the reach pattern selected by the lottery is displayed. As a result, even if the frequency at which the special information corresponds to the first additional information and the frequency at which the second additional information corresponds to the special information are different, the displayed reach patterns are less likely to be biased. Therefore, in a situation where the frequency at which the special information corresponds to the first additional information is different from the frequency at which the special information corresponds to the second additional information, it is possible to ensure the diversity of the specific reach variation display.

  The first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state may be set as the following game states. That is, the assignment determining means includes a high-probability assignment determining means (a function of executing the process of step S803 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) in which the probability of the assignment correspondence result is relatively high and low, and a low-probability assignment determining means (The function of executing the process of step S802 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81), wherein the first predetermined game state is determined by the high-probability provision determination means and the low-probability provision when the provision determination is performed. Among the determination means, the low probability provision determination means is a game state in which the provision determination is performed, and the second predetermined game state is, when the provision determination is performed, the high probability provision determination means and the low probability provision The first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state are configured to be in a game state in which the provision determination is performed by the high probability provision determination means among the determination means. It may be provided a difference in advantage between Teiyugi state.

  A variable ball entry means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state where game balls flowing down the game area easily enter and a closed state where it is difficult to enter the ball; A variable ball entry control means for executing variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to an open state and then switching to a closed state (a function for executing a special winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81); Providing means (payout device 96, payout control device 97) for giving a game ball to a player based on the ball being entered by the means, wherein the first predetermined game state by the first state transition means is provided. When the transition of the game state to occurs, the variable ball-in control by the variable ball-in control means until the number of switching between the open state and the closed state in the variable ball-in means becomes a predetermined number. When the transition to the first predetermined game state is performed and the transition of the game state to the second predetermined game state by the second state transition means occurs, the open state in the variable ball entry means is determined. The variable ball control by the variable ball control unit may be performed and the transition to the second predetermined game state may be performed until the number of times of switching to the closed state becomes a predetermined number.

Feature A22. In the display mode according to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means, as a pre-stage for stopping the variable display, one of the predetermined active lines in the display screen may be displayed on one of the active lines. The stop line displays the combination of the first reach patterns composed of the patterns constituting the combination of the first assignment target patterns, thereby forming the reach line, and forming the combination of the second assignment target patterns on other effective lines. A plurality of reach modes in which a reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of the second reach patterns composed of patterns to be displayed, and a specific reach variation display is performed by a final stop display area in a situation where the plurality of reach lines are formed. Is included,
The special notification restricting unit is configured not to be in the plural reach mode in a situation where a combination of the special notification target patterns according to the special information set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification is a combination of the first special notification target patterns. The gaming machine according to Feature A21, wherein when the symbol constituting the second grant target symbol is stopped and displayed in the final stop display area, execution of the multiple reach mode is restricted. .

  According to the feature A22, in the multiple reach mode, in the situation where the combination of the special notification target patterns according to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification is the combination of the first special notification target patterns, the second addition is performed. When the pattern constituting the target picture is stopped and displayed in the final stop display area, the combination of the special notification target picture may be stopped and displayed by combining the second giving target picture and the second reach picture. On the other hand, according to the present feature, in a situation where the combination of the special notification target patterns according to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification is the combination of the first special notification target patterns, the plural reach mode is set. In the case where the pattern is not changed or the pattern constituting the second target pattern is stopped and displayed in the final stop display area, the execution of the multiple reach mode is restricted. Thereby, the combination of the special notification target pattern is not stopped and displayed by the combination of the second reach pattern and the pattern stopped and displayed in the final stop display area. Accordingly, the reach mode is diversified, and a decrease in the willingness to play is prevented.

Feature A23. The special notification control means is for causing the special notification to be performed using the same pattern as a pattern that constitutes a combination of the patterns to be provided with the game times related to the special information set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification. Yes,
In the situation where the pattern stopped and displayed in correspondence with the variable display time in the final stop display area is not the same pattern, the special notification restricting means does not stop and display the combination of the special notification target patterns using the pattern. The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A20, wherein the reach pattern is displayed as described above.

  According to the feature A23, in the final stop display area, a pattern that is stopped and displayed in accordance with the variable display time is a pattern that is stopped and displayed in accordance with the variable display time, and a pattern in which the special notification is set as a trigger for executing the special notification. If the pattern is not the same as the pattern constituting the combination of the patterns to be given in the game related to the information, the pattern in which the combination of the special notification target patterns using the pattern is not stopped and displayed is determined as the reach pattern. As a result, the execution of the special notification with a pattern different from the pattern that constitutes the combination of the patterns to be given the game times related to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to associate the mode of the stop result with the game time in which the special notification is executed and the game time related to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification, and display the pattern in these consecutive game times. The aspects can be provided to the player as a series.

  In addition, in relation to the feature A18, "the special notification restricting means determines that the pattern stopped and displayed in the final stop display area corresponding to the variable display time is not the same pattern by the pattern determining means. In this case, the reach pattern selected by the reach pattern lottery means is displayed, and the pattern corresponding to the variable display time is stopped and displayed in the final stop display area as it is ".

Feature A24. In the display mode according to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means, as a step before stopping the variable display, one of a plurality of preset active lines in the display screen is displayed on one of the active lines. At the same time, the first reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the reach pattern combination of the same pattern, and the second reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the other reach pattern combination on the other effective lines. A plurality of reach modes for performing a specific reach variation display by the final stop display area in a situation where the plurality of reach lines are formed,
The special notification restriction unit is configured to prevent the multiple reach mode or restrict execution of the multiple reach mode when a pattern different from the same pattern is stopped and displayed in the final stop display area. The gaming machine according to feature A23, wherein:

  According to the feature A24, in the multiple reach mode, when a pattern different from the same pattern as the pattern constituting the combination of the patterns to be provided of the game times related to the special information is stopped and displayed in the final stop display area, The execution of the reach mode is restricted. Thereby, the combination of the special notification target pattern with a different pattern from the same pattern is not stopped and displayed by the other reach patterns and the pattern stopped and displayed in the final stop display area. Therefore, it is possible to associate the game time at which the special notification is executed with the game time related to the special information set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification.

  Feature A25. The mode according to any one of features A1 to A24, wherein the mode information determining means is configured to determine a special mode as a display mode according to the mode information based on a result of the assignment determination. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A25, when it is necessary to change the variable display time when the display mode is set to the special mode, the execution of the special notification is restricted, and the execution frequency of the special notification may be reduced. Then, there is a possibility that the willingness to play decreases. On the other hand, according to the present feature, the special notification can be performed even in the game times other than the game time in which the special notification is performed, so that the special notification is performed in comparison with the case in which the special notification is performed only in the game time. The notification is executed more frequently. Therefore, the special notification can be executed at an appropriate frequency.

  Feature A26. The special notification control means selects a lottery means (step S1907 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the special notification in the game times for which the determination is made before the special information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A25, comprising:

  According to the feature A26, the special notification is executed only when the lottery means is won. As a result, the special notification may not be continuously performed. Therefore, even when the special notification is not continuously performed, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the game. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the special mode. Further, even if the special notification is restricted by the special notification restriction unit, the restriction does not easily give the player a sense of incongruity. Thereby, the execution of the special notification can be restricted without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

Feature A27. Trigger information storage means (function for storing a notice condition satisfaction flag in the work RAM 254 of the display control device 212) for storing trigger information based on the fact that the specifying result by the preceding specifying means is a predetermined specifying result;
In the situation where the trigger information is stored, when the trigger information is stored, the special notification control unit stores the trigger information corresponding to the information specified by the first specifying unit. In such a case, the special information that has become a target of the destination specifying means and has been a trigger of the execution of the special notification is to be executed at a timing before the target of the assignment determination is performed,
Further, a trigger information determination unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S1505 and S1509 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for determining whether or not the trigger information is stored;
While it is determined that the trigger information is stored, the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit after the special information that triggered the execution of the special notification and the timing of the execution of the special notification Trigger information regulating means for regulating not to be set as such information (function of executing processing after making an affirmative determination in step S1505 in MPU 252 of display control device 212, executing processing after making an affirmative determination in step S1509) Function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A26, comprising:

  According to the feature A27, even if special information is newly stored in a situation where special notification has already been set, new special notification is not set for the special information. As a result, the special information that triggers the execution of the special notification does not overlap in the acquired information storage unit, and the special information that triggers the execution of the special notification becomes clear. If the special information that triggers the execution of the special notification is duplicated, for example, it is necessary to consider the other special information when executing the special notification related to one of the special information, and thus the processing becomes complicated. Although there is a possibility, such a situation can be prevented from occurring by preventing the above-described duplication.

Feature A28. Notification execution determining means (MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for determining whether to perform the special notification on the special information targeted by the destination specifying means based on the specification by the destination specifying means. Function to execute the pending command corresponding processing).
The gaming machine according to Feature A27, wherein the trigger information is stored in the trigger information storage unit when the notification execution determining unit determines to perform the special notification.

  According to the feature A28, the operation and effect of the feature A27 can be exerted without restricting the specific execution in the preceding specifying means. Thus, for example, when the control subject that performs the process related to the destination specifying means and the control subject that performs the process related to the special notification are different, the information that the latter control subject has determined to execute the special notification is controlled by the control of the former. There is no need to make the subject aware.

Feature A29. An assignment information correspondence determination unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S1503 and S1508 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for determining whether or not the special information corresponding to the addition information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit; ,
While it is determined that the special information corresponding to the additional information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit, the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit after the special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit Additional information correspondence regulating means for restricting information from being set as information that triggers the execution of the special notification (function of executing processing after making an affirmative determination in step S1503 in MPU 252 of display control device 212, step S1508) Function to execute the processing after making a positive determination in
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A28, comprising:

  According to the feature A29, in the situation where the special notification is being executed, in the game times related to the special information different from the special information that is the trigger of the execution of the special notification, the first predetermined game state or the second predetermined game state is set. The application can be prevented from occurring.

Feature A30. Notification execution determining means (MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for determining whether to perform the special notification on the special information targeted by the destination specifying means based on the specification by the destination specifying means. Function to execute the pending command corresponding processing).
When the notification execution determination unit determines that the special notification is to be performed, the special information targeted for the determination is set as a trigger for the execution of the special notification, so that the special notification control unit is The special notification is performed,
The additional information correspondence restricting unit, while it is determined that the special information corresponding to the additional information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit, even if the identification is performed by the preceding identification unit, The gaming machine according to Feature A29, wherein the notification execution determining means restricts the determination from being performed.

  According to the feature A30, the operation and effect of the feature A29 can be exerted without restricting specific execution in the preceding specifying means.

Feature B1. An information acquisition unit (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (reservation area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers up to a predetermined number defined as an upper limit;
When a determination is made as to whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to predetermined addition information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit A determination unit (a function of executing a success / failure determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for sequentially performing the determination on the plurality of pieces of special information;
Privilege granting means (main control) for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81);
Prior to the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means or based on the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means, a game replay operation is started, and corresponds to the determination result of the provision determination means. The end of the gaming operation as a notification result is set as one of the gaming operations, and the gaming operation of each gaming operation is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means (a function of executing a change start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, and a function of executing a change display control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means determines, in each game time, mode information corresponding to an operation mode when the game round operation is performed based on the result of the determination of the provision, and determines mode information (display control device 212). Of the MPU 252), and when the game operation is performed for each game, the game operation is performed in an operation mode according to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means. Is performed.
The information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the assignment determination is the information before the predetermined special information is targeted for the assignment determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at the timing (a function of executing a confirmation process for suspension notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
State setting means for setting a special notification state based on the result of the specification by the preceding specifying means being a predetermined result (a function of executing a setting process of a hold command in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
In the situation where the special notification state is set, and when the setting is performed, in a situation where a game time prior to the game time related to the special information which has been specified by the destination specifying means is performed. The special notification corresponding to the specified result of the preceding specifying means with respect to the specified special information is executed by the predetermined notifying means or the different notifying means, and the gaming operation is performed. Is performed, and the special notification state corresponding to the set special notification state is set to the special notification state when the special notification state is set during a predetermined period during the game rotation operation. A special notification control means (a function for executing a stop result setting process corresponding to the suspension notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 and a function for changing the status) which are performed by the end timing of the operation. And the ability to run the management),
If the special notification state is set during a predetermined period during the game replay operation in a situation where the game replay operation is being performed, the special information state is determined by the mode information determining means in the game replay. Execution of special notification by the special notification control means or a special notification restriction means (a function of executing a reach correspondence process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for restricting the execution mode according to the aspect information;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature B1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit and not subject to the addition determination is performed at a timing before the special information becomes the target of the addition determination. May be executed. Thereby, for the player, not only the game for confirming the acquisition determination result of the acquired special information, but also when the plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit, the order of the determination of the addition is determined. For the later special information, a game for confirming or predicting the result of the case of being subjected to the grant determination according to the content of the special notification is added, thereby diversifying the game. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  Furthermore, in a situation where the game replay operation is being performed, and during a predetermined period during the game replay operation, a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, a game ball enters the operating port) is established. If the special information obtained by the specification is specified by the preceding specifying means and the special notification state is set, the special notification corresponding to the special notification state is performed by the end timing of the game round operation There is. As a result, when the special notification is performed, the time from when the acquisition condition is satisfied to when the special notification is executed can be shortened, and the opportunity for the player to confirm the special notification is increased. Can be

  In such a configuration, when the game round operation time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determination means is different from the game round operation time corresponding to the special notification, for example, the game round operation time corresponding to the special notification If the game time is changed to, the game round operation time fluctuates with the execution of the special notification. Therefore, there is a possibility that a difference occurs in the digestion rate of the game round per unit time depending on the game hall. On the other hand, if the special notification is performed without changing the game rotation operation time in a situation where the game rotation operation has already been performed, an unnatural state may be caused, and the player may feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the special notification state is set during a predetermined period during the game revolving operation in a situation where the game revolving operation is being performed, the mode information is determined by the mode information determining means in the game round. The execution of the special notification by the special notification control means or the execution mode thereof is restricted according to the mode information that has been set, so that it is possible to increase the degree of interest in the game while suppressing the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above. .

  As described above, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B2. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting ball entry portion (upper working port 33, lower working port 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the starting ball entry section;
Acquisition information storage means (reservation area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers up to a predetermined number defined as an upper limit;
When a determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to predetermined addition information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit A determination unit (a function of executing a success / failure determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for sequentially performing the determination on the plurality of pieces of special information;
Privilege granting means (main control) for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81);
A game turn-around operation is started prior to the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means or based on the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means, and a notification corresponding to the result of the provision determination is provided. As a result, the end of the game repetition operation is defined as one of the game repetitions, and a predetermined time is set so that the game repetition operation of each game repetition is performed according to the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means. Game time control means (a function of executing the fluctuation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and a function of executing the fluctuation display control processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for controlling the notification means of
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means determines, in each game time, mode information corresponding to an operation mode when the game round operation is performed based on the result of the determination of the provision, and determines mode information (display control device 212). Of the MPU 252), and when the game operation is performed for each game, the game operation is performed in an operation mode according to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means. Is performed.
The information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the assignment determination is the information before the predetermined special information is targeted for the assignment determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at the timing (a function of executing a confirmation process for suspension notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
State setting means for setting a special notification state based on the result of the specification by the preceding specifying means being a predetermined result (a function of executing a setting process of a hold command in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
In the situation where the special notification state is set, and when the setting is performed, in a situation where a game time prior to the game time related to the special information specified by the destination specifying unit is performed, The special notification corresponding to the specified result of the destination specifying means for the specified special information is executed by the predetermined notifying means, and the game round operation is performed. And, when the setting of the special notification state is performed during a predetermined period during the game reusing operation, the special notification corresponding to the set special notification state is performed by the end timing of the game reusing operation. Special notification control means to be performed (a function of executing a stop result setting process corresponding to a suspension notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 and a function of executing a process during fluctuation);
If the special notification state is set during a predetermined period during the game replay operation in a situation where the game replay operation is being performed, the special information state is determined by the mode information determining means in the game replay. Execution of special notification by the special notification control means or a special notification restriction means (a function of executing a reach correspondence process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for restricting the execution mode according to the aspect information;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature B2, the special notification according to the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit and not subject to the addition determination is performed at a timing before the special information becomes the target of the addition determination. May be executed. Thereby, for the player, not only the game for generating the entry of the game ball into the starting entry section and the game for confirming the result of the determination of the addition of the special information acquired based on the entry, a plurality of special When the information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result of the case where the information becomes the object of the assignment determination is confirmed or predicted according to the content of the special notification for the special information whose order of the object of the assignment determination is later. A game to play is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In addition, the player knows the determination result of each game round by using a predetermined notification unit. The mode information corresponding to the operation mode of the notifying unit is determined by the mode information determining unit based on the assignment determination result. Then, the special notification is executed by the predetermined notification means. As a result, if the player tries to grasp the grant determination result of each game round, the special notification can be naturally checked, and even though the special notification has been performed, it can be overlooked. Is suppressed.

  Furthermore, in a situation where the game replay operation is being performed, and during a predetermined period during the game replay operation, a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, a game ball enters the operating port) is established. If the special information obtained by the specification is specified by the preceding specifying means and the special notification state is set, the special notification corresponding to the special notification state is performed by the end timing of the game round operation There is. As a result, when the special notification is performed, the time from when the acquisition condition is satisfied to when the special notification is executed can be shortened, and the opportunity for the player to confirm the special notification is increased. Can be

  In such a configuration, when the game round operation time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determination means is different from the game round operation time corresponding to the special notification, for example, the game round operation time corresponding to the special notification If the game time is changed to, the game round operation time fluctuates with the execution of the special notification. Therefore, there is a possibility that a difference occurs in the digestion rate of the game round per unit time depending on the game hall. On the other hand, if the special notification is performed without changing the game rotation operation time in a situation where the game rotation operation has already been performed, an unnatural state may be caused, and the player may feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the special notification state is set during a predetermined period during the game revolving operation in a situation where the game revolving operation is being performed, the mode information determining means performs the game round in the game round. By restricting the execution of the special notification control means or the execution mode according to the determined mode information, it is possible to increase the degree of interest in the game while suppressing the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience.

  As described above, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature B3. The special notification restricting unit is configured to set the special notification state during a predetermined period during the game replay operation in a situation where the game replay operation is being performed. If the game round operation time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means is changed in performing the special notification, the special notification is restricted so as not to be performed in the game round. The gaming machine according to Feature B1 or Feature B2, characterized in that:

  According to the feature B3, even in a situation where the game revolving operation is being performed and the special notification state is set during a predetermined period during the game revolving operation, the game revolving operation is not performed. When the game round operation time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means is changed in performing the special notification, the special notification is limited so as not to be performed in the game round. In this case, since it is sufficient to simply not execute the process, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing an increase in the processing load, as compared with a configuration in which a process such as correction or adjustment is performed.

Feature B4. The execution mode of the special notification is set to a plurality of types,
The special notification control means is configured to select any one of the plurality of types of execution modes and execute the special notification,
The special notification restricting unit is configured to perform the above-described mode in the game round when the setting of the special notification state is performed in a predetermined period during the game round operation while the game round operation is being performed. According to any one of the features B1 to B3, a predetermined execution mode is limited so as not to be selected from the plurality of types of execution modes in accordance with the mode information determined by the information determination unit. The described gaming machine.

  According to the feature B4, a plurality of types of special notification execution modes are set, and the special notification is executed in any one of the plurality of types of execution modes. This makes it possible to diversify the special notification.

  Here, a restriction is made so that a predetermined execution mode is not selected from a plurality of types of execution modes. Thereby, the special notification can be satisfactorily executed according to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means, for example.

Feature B5. The predetermined notification means is a picture display means (symbol display device 41) for variably displaying a picture in each of a plurality of variable display areas (symbol rows Z1 to Z3) on a display screen (display screen G);
The game number control means starts the variable display of the picture in the picture display means before the giving judgment is made by the giving judgment means or based on the giving judgment made by the giving judgment means. The stop result corresponding to the determination result of the giving determination is displayed, and the end of the change display of the pattern is set as one of the game times, according to the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit. It is to make the fluctuation display of the pattern of the game times,
The aspect information determining means is for determining aspect information corresponding to a display aspect of a series of patterns on the display screen in a case where the variation display of the pattern is performed,
The special notification control means is configured to stop the game round when the special notification state is set during a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern in a situation where the display of the pattern is being changed. The special notification is performed by causing the result to be in a special mode corresponding to the special notification state,
The special notification restricting means, in a situation where the display of the pattern is being changed and the setting of the special notification state is performed in a predetermined period during the display of the pattern being changed, If the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means is changed in order to set the stop result to the special mode, the stop result of the game time is not set to the special mode. The gaming machine according to Feature B3 or Feature B4, wherein

  According to the feature B5, since the special notification is performed in the form of the stop result in each game round, the timing at which the special notification is performed becomes clear to the player, and the possibility of missing the special notification is reduced.

  Here, even in the case where the pattern is displayed in a variable manner and the special notification state is set during a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the mode information is set. Is changed in the special mode, the stop result is not set to the special mode in the game round. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a change in the variable display time due to the execution of the special notification.

Feature B6. The game time control means may determine a mode of a game time stop result performed when the special information corresponding to the provided information becomes a target of the determination on one of the predetermined activated lines on the display screen. In the aspect, the combination of the assignment target patterns formed by the patterns variably displayed in the plurality of variably displayed areas is stopped and displayed,
The special notification control means may include, as the special aspect, a combination formed by a pattern that is variably displayed in the plurality of variable display areas, and a combination of a special notification target pattern that is different from the combination of the assignment target pattern is the validity. To be stopped and displayed at a different position from the line or the valid line,
The special notification restriction means, in a situation where the display of the pattern is being changed and the setting of the special notification state is performed during a predetermined period during the display of the pattern being changed, If the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means is changed to stop and display the combination of the special notification target patterns corresponding to the special notification state, the special display is changed in the game time. The gaming machine according to Feature B5, wherein a combination of notification target patterns is restricted so as not to be stopped and displayed.

  According to the feature B6, the combination of the patterns to be given is stopped and displayed on one activated line in the game time related to the special information corresponding to the added information, and therefore, the game corresponds to the added information for the player. Can be clearly understood. In this case, since the combination of the special notification target patterns is stopped and displayed at the game time when the special notification is performed, it is possible to clearly understand that some players correspond to the special notification.

  In such a configuration, even if the special notification state is set during a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern while the variable display of the pattern is being performed, the mode information is determined in the game round. If the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the means is changed for stopping and displaying the combination of the special notification target patterns, the stop display of the special notification target pattern combination is limited in the game time. You. Thereby, the effect of the feature B1 or the feature B2 can be exerted while clearly grasping that the special notification is supported.

Feature B7. A part of the plurality of variable display areas and at least a stop result of the specific variable display area is configured to correspond to a variable display time of a corresponding game time at least in a specific situation,
The special notification restricting unit is configured to perform the change even if the special notification state is set during the predetermined period during the variation display of the pattern in the game time in the specific situation and during the variation display of the pattern. If the pattern stopped and displayed in the specific variable display area in correspondence with the display time does not correspond to the combination of the special notification target pattern corresponding to the special notification state, the pattern corresponding to the variable display time is The gaming machine according to Feature B6, wherein execution of the special notification is restricted by being stopped and displayed as it is.

  According to the feature B7, at least in the specific situation, at least the display mode of the specific variable display area is associated with the variable display time of the corresponding game, so that the storage capacity to be stored in advance is reduced. Becomes possible.

  Here, when the special notification state is set during a predetermined period during the variation display of the pattern in the game round in which the specific situation occurs, the special notification target corresponding to the special notification state is set. If the stop result of the specific variable display area is changed in order to stop and display the combination of pictures, the variable display time will be changed. On the other hand, according to the present feature, even if the special notification state is set during a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern in the game time in the specific situation and during the variable display of the pattern, If the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the specific fluctuation display area in accordance with the display time does not correspond to the combination of the special notification target pattern according to the set special notification state, the pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display time stops as it is The execution of the special notification is restricted by being displayed. This suppresses a change in the variable display time associated with the execution of the special notification in the game times in a specific situation.

Feature B8. In each of the game times, based on a result of the giving determination, a variable display time determining unit that determines a variable display time when the variable display of the pattern is performed, the mode information determining unit includes the variable display time determining unit Is to determine the aspect information corresponding to the determined variable display time,
In a display mode corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means, as a pre-stage for stopping the variable display, one of a plurality of preset active lines in the display screen is displayed on one active line. The reach pattern (reach symbol) in which the combination of the assignment target patterns is likely to be established is stopped and displayed, thereby forming a reach line. Includes a mode to perform variable display,
At least the display mode of the game times in which the specific reach variation display is performed is such that in the final stop display area, a period from a variation start timing to a timing at which the specific reach variation display is started is a predetermined period. And the mode at the timing when the specific reach variation display is started is set to be a predetermined mode, so that the final stop display area stop result is at least a specific mode. In the game time when the reach fluctuation display is performed, it is configured to correspond to the fluctuation display time,
The special notification restricting unit is configured to set the special notification state during the predetermined period during the variation display of the pattern during the game in which the specific reach variation display is performed and during the variation display of the pattern. Also, if the pattern stopped and displayed in the final stop display area in correspondence with the variable display time does not correspond to the combination of the special notification target pattern according to the special notification state, it corresponds to the variable display time. The gaming machine according to Feature B6, characterized in that execution of the special notification is restricted by stopping and displaying the pattern being displayed as it is.

  According to the feature B8, in the specific reach fluctuation display, the period from the fluctuation start timing to the timing at which the specific reach fluctuation display is started is a predetermined period, and the specific reach fluctuation display is started. Since the mode at the timing of the execution is a predetermined mode, the stop result of the final stop display area corresponds to the variable display time. As a result, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for displaying the pattern in a variable manner.

  Here, in the game time in which the specific reach fluctuation display is performed, when the stop result of the final stop display area is changed in order to stop and display the combination of the special notification target patterns according to the special notification state, the fluctuation display time is changed. It will be. On the other hand, according to the present feature, even if the special notification state is set during the fluctuation display in the game time in which the specific reach fluctuation display is performed, the display is stopped and displayed in the final stop display area corresponding to the fluctuation display time. If the pattern does not correspond to the special notification target pattern combination according to the special notification state, the execution of the special notification is restricted by stopping and displaying the pattern corresponding to the variable display time as it is Have been. Thereby, the change of the variable display time accompanying the execution of the special notification is suppressed.

Feature B9. The plurality of variable display areas, which are stopped and displayed before the final stop display area, include a predetermined display area in which a plurality of symbols can be simultaneously stopped and displayed,
The special notification restricting means sets the special notification state in a state where the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is in a higher identification mode than before or the pattern in the predetermined display area is stopped and displayed. In the case where the pattern information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined display area is one and the possible reach line is one, regardless of the stop result of the final stop display area, The gaming machine according to Feature B8, wherein the execution of the special notification is restricted by stopping and displaying the display mode corresponding to the mode information determined by the determining unit.

  When only one pattern is stopped and displayed in the predetermined display area, the pattern is uniquely determined as a reach pattern. In this state, if there is only one reach line, there is no room to change the reach pattern and the reach line. In this case, according to this feature, the execution of the special notification is restricted by displaying the display mode corresponding to the mode information as it is regardless of the stop result of the final stop display area. Thereby, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature B10. The plurality of variable display areas include a predetermined display area that is stopped and displayed before the final stop display area, and a predetermined stop position of the predetermined display area is set as a position through which a plurality of effective lines pass. Has been
The special notification control unit is configured to enter the special notification state in a situation in which the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is in a higher identification mode than before, or in a situation in which the pattern in the predetermined display area is stopped and displayed. When the pattern is set and the pattern stopped and displayed at the predetermined stop position in the predetermined display area includes a pattern constituting a combination of a special notification target pattern corresponding to the special notification state set this time. The display of the special notification target pattern by displaying a reach pattern corresponding to the pattern on any one of the plurality of valid lines.
When the special notification restriction unit displays the reach pattern determined by the special notification control unit on a predetermined effective line of the plurality of effective lines, the combination of the assignment target patterns is stopped and displayed. In the situation, the reach pattern determined by the special notification control means is displayed on an effective line different from the predetermined effective line among the plurality of effective lines so that the combination of the assignment target patterns is not stopped and displayed. The gaming machine according to Feature B8 or Feature B9, characterized in that:

  According to the feature B10, since the reach pattern is stopped and displayed on any one of the plurality of effective lines, it is possible to diversify the mode of the stop result when a specific reach variation display is performed.

  Here, when the special notification state is set in a situation where the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is already in a higher identification mode than before, or in a situation where the pattern in the predetermined display area is stopped and displayed. In the case where the pattern stopped and displayed at the predetermined stop position in the predetermined display area includes a pattern constituting a combination of the special notification target pattern corresponding to the special notification state set this time, the combination of the assignment target pattern , The combination of the special notification target patterns can be stopped and displayed. Thereby, the opportunity to execute the special notification corresponding to the special notification state is increased.

Feature B11. The plurality of variable display areas include a predetermined display area that is stopped and displayed before the final stop display area, and a predetermined stop position of the predetermined display area is set as a position through which a plurality of effective lines pass. Has been
The special notification control means may be configured to perform the special display in a situation where the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is in a higher identification mode than before, or in a state where the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is stopped and displayed. In the case of being set to the notification state, the pattern stopped and displayed at the predetermined stop position in the predetermined display area includes a pattern constituting a combination of a special notification target pattern corresponding to the special notification state set this time. In the case of displaying a combination of the special notification target pattern by displaying a reach pattern corresponding to the pattern on any of the plurality of valid lines.
The special notification restricting means is a special notification target pattern which does not correspond to the set special notification state when the reach pattern determined by the special notification control means is displayed on a predetermined valid line among the plurality of valid lines. In the situation where the combination of the special notification target means is stopped and displayed, the reach pattern determined by the special notification control means is set so that the combination of the special notification target pattern is not stopped and displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B8 to B10, wherein the game is displayed on an active line different from the active line.

  According to the feature B11, the reach pattern is stopped and displayed on any one of the plurality of effective lines, so that it is possible to diversify the mode of the stop result when a specific reach variation display is performed.

  Here, when the special notification state is set in a situation where the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is already in a higher identification mode than before, or in a situation where the pattern in the predetermined display area is stopped and displayed. If the pattern stopped and displayed at the predetermined stop position in the predetermined display area includes a pattern constituting a combination of the special notification target pattern corresponding to the special notification state set this time, the special set this time It is possible to stop and display the combination of the special notification target patterns while avoiding the combination of the special notification target patterns that do not correspond to the notification state. Thereby, the game time that triggered the setting of the special notification state can be associated with the game time that executes the special notification.

Feature B12. The predetermined notifying means is a picture display means for variably displaying a picture in each of a plurality of variable display areas on a display screen,
The game number control means starts the variable display of the picture in the picture display means before the giving judgment is made by the giving judgment means or based on the giving judgment made by the giving judgment means. The stop result corresponding to the determination result of the giving determination is displayed, and the end of the change display of the pattern is set as one of the game times, according to the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit. It is to make the fluctuation display of the pattern of the game times,
The aspect information determining means is for determining aspect information corresponding to a display aspect of a series of patterns on the display screen in a case where the variation display of the pattern is performed,
The plurality of variable display areas include a final stop display area and a predetermined display area in which a pattern is stopped and displayed before the final stop display area,
The special notification control means performs the special notification by causing the stop result of the game round to be a special mode corresponding to the special notification state. In the case where the special notification state is set in a state where the pattern is in a higher identification mode than before or the pattern in the predetermined display area is stopped and displayed, the stop result of the predetermined display area is set this time. If it corresponds to the special mode according to the special notification state that has been performed, it is possible to modify the result of stopping the game times to the special mode,
The special notification restricting means sets the special notification state in a state where the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is in a higher identification mode than before or the pattern in the predetermined display area is stopped and displayed. Even if it is performed, if at least the stop result of the predetermined display area does not correspond to the special mode according to the special notification state set this time, it corresponds to the mode information determined by the mode information determining unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11, wherein execution of the special notification is restricted by displaying the display mode as it is.

  According to the feature B12, even if the variation display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is in a form with higher discrimination than before or the pattern in the predetermined display area is stopped and displayed, the stop result is a special mode. Therefore, the opportunity to execute the special notification is increased.

  Here, in a situation where the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is in a form with higher discrimination than before, or in the case where the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is finished, the player can change the pattern being displayed in the variable display. You can check. In such a state, if the stop result of the predetermined display area not corresponding to the special mode according to the special notification state set this time is set to correspond to the special mode, the change mode is easily recognized by the player. , The player may feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, according to the present feature, the special notification is performed in a situation where the variation display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is in a higher identification mode than before, or the variation display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is finished. Even if the state is set, if at least the stop result of the predetermined display area does not correspond to the special mode corresponding to the special notification state set this time, the display corresponding to the mode information without the special mode is performed. Execution of the special notification is restricted by displaying the mode as it is. Thereby, the opportunity to execute the special notification without giving the player a sense of discomfort is enhanced.

Feature B13. The special notification control means,
Progress determination means (display control device 212) for determining whether or not the special notification state has been set by the state setting means during a period from the start of the variable display of the pattern to the elapse of a predetermined reference period. Of the MPU 252 for executing the processing of steps S2604, S2608, S2614, S3105, S3111, etc.)
A correction information storage unit (correction table storage area 320) for storing a plurality of types of mode information corresponding to the display mode for correction after the reference period,
Based on the elapse determination means determining that the special notification state has been set before the elapse of the reference period, the mode information after the reference period in the current game time is changed to the mode information. And mode information switching means for switching to the mode information for correction corresponding to the mode information of the special mode (a function for executing the processing of step S2606, step S2612, step S2618, step S3108, 3117, etc. in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) )When,
With
When the aspect information is switched to the correction aspect information by the aspect information switching means, a display mode including a stoppage result of the game related to the switching is configured to be the special mode,
The special notification restriction unit is a case where the special notification state is set by the progress determination unit until the reference period elapses, and corresponds to the mode information determined by the mode information determination unit. In the case where the variable display time is changed in switching to the mode information for correction, execution of switching of the mode information by the mode information switching unit is restricted. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature B13, when the initial display mode is changed to the special mode during the game round, a part of the pattern display mode is switched to the mode information for correction. In the flow, the stop result can be made a special mode. Therefore, the special mode can be displayed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  In such a configuration, when the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining unit is changed in switching to the mode information for correction, execution of the switching is restricted. In this case, a display mode corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means is displayed. The display mode does not correspond to the special mode. Therefore, the execution of the special information is restricted by restricting the execution of the switching of the aspect information. Therefore, the special notification can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and the effects described in the feature B1 or the feature B2 can be achieved.

  Further, only when the display mode can be set to the special mode without changing the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means, the mode information is switched. Therefore, the processing load related to the switching can be reduced.

Feature B14. A picture display means for variably displaying pictures on a display screen (display screen G);
Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting ball entry portion (upper working port 33, lower working port 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the starting ball entry section;
Acquisition information storage means (reservation area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers up to a predetermined number defined as an upper limit;
When a transition determination is made as to whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to predetermined transition information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit A transfer determination unit (a function of executing a success / failure determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for sequentially performing the transfer determination on the plurality of pieces of special information;
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means being a shift corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the shift information. State shifting means (a function of executing a game state shifting process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81);
Prior to the transition determination being performed by the transition determination unit or based on the transition determination being performed by the transition determination unit, a variation display of the pattern is started in the pattern display unit, and the determination of the transition determination is performed. Displaying the notification result corresponding to the result and terminating the variation display of the pattern as one of the game times, and displaying the variation of the pattern of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means. Game time control means (a function of executing a change start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and a function of executing a change display control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) so as to perform the pattern display means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means determines, in each game time, mode information corresponding to a display mode in the case of performing the variable display of the pattern based on the result of the shift determination (mode control unit 212). Of the MPU 252, the display mode according to the aspect information determined by the aspect information determining means is displayed on the display screen when the variation display of the pattern for each game is performed. And
The information reflecting the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the obtained information storage unit is the target of the shift determination is information before the predetermined special information is the target of the transfer determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at the timing (a function of executing a confirmation process for a reservation notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
State setting means for setting a special notification state based on the result of the specification by the preceding specifying means being a predetermined result (a function of executing a setting process of a hold command in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
When the setting of the special notification state is performed, the display mode of the game times prior to the game times related to the special information specified by the previous specifying means is changed to When the special mode corresponding to the specific result of the specifying means is set and the special notification state is set in a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern while the variable display of the pattern is being performed. In addition, the special notification control means (corresponding to the suspension notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) which performs the special notification by setting the display mode related to the game time in which the pattern is displayed in the special mode to the special mode. Function to execute the stopped result setting process and the function to execute the process during fluctuation),
If the special notification state is set during a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed, the special information state is determined by the mode information determining means in the game round. Special notification restriction means for executing the special notification by the special notification control means or restricting the execution mode according to the variable display time corresponding to the mode information (the function of executing the reach correspondence processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212); ,
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature B14, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit and not subject to the transition determination is performed at a timing before the special information is subject to the transition determination. May be executed. Accordingly, for the player, not only the game for generating the ball entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry unit and the game for confirming the transition determination result of the special information acquired based on the ball entry, a plurality of special If the information is stored in the acquired information storage means, for the special information whose order of transition is determined later, the result when the target of transition determination is confirmed or predicted according to the content of the special notification. A game to play is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In addition, the player recognizes the shift determination result of each game round by visually recognizing the display mode of the pattern on the pattern display means. The mode information according to the display mode of the picture is determined by the mode information determining means based on the shift determination result. Then, the display mode of the game times related to the special information targeted for the transition determination before the predetermined special information is targeted for the transition determination becomes a special mode corresponding to the content of the predetermined special information, Special announcements are made. Thereby, if the player is paying attention to the display screen of the picture display means in order to grasp the transition determination result of each game round, the special notification can be naturally confirmed, and despite the special notification being performed, It is suppressed that it is overlooked.

  Furthermore, when a new ball is entered into the starting ball entry section during a predetermined period during the variable display in a situation where the pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the special information acquired based on the ball entry. In some cases, a special notification state is set, and a special notification corresponding to the special notification state is performed in a game round in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner. As a result, when the special notification is performed, it is possible to advance the time from the occurrence of the ball entry to the starting ball entry section to the time when the special notification is performed, and the special notification is provided to the player. The opportunity to confirm is increased.

  In such a configuration, when the specification by the first specifying means is performed in a situation where the display of the pattern is being changed, and the display mode in the game round is a special mode corresponding to the specified information, the above-described mode is set in the game round. According to the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the information determining unit, the execution of the special notification or the mode of the execution is limited. Here, when the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means and the variable display time corresponding to the special mode are different, for example, the variable display time is changed to display the special mode. In this case, since the variable display time fluctuates with the execution of the special notification, there is a possibility that a difference occurs in the digestibility of the game times per unit time depending on the game hall. On the other hand, in the case where the special mode is displayed without changing the variable display time under the situation in which the variable display of the pattern is being performed, the display mode becomes unnatural, and the player may feel uncomfortable. There is. On the other hand, the execution of the special notification or the execution mode thereof is limited in accordance with the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determination unit as described above, so that the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience is prevented. It is possible to increase the degree of interest in the game while suppressing the game.

  As described above, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B15. A picture display means for variably displaying pictures on a display screen (display screen G);
Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting ball entry portion (upper working port 33, lower working port 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the starting ball entry section;
Acquisition information storage means (reservation area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers up to a predetermined number defined as an upper limit;
When a transition determination is made as to whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to predetermined transition information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit A transfer determination unit (a function of executing a success / failure determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for sequentially performing the transfer determination on the plurality of pieces of special information;
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means being a shift corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the shift information. State shifting means (a function of executing a game state shifting process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81);
Prior to the transition determination being performed by the transition determination unit or based on the transition determination being performed by the transition determination unit, a variation display of the pattern is started in the pattern display unit, and the determination of the transition determination is performed. Displaying the notification result corresponding to the result and terminating the variation display of the pattern as one of the game times, and displaying the variation of the pattern of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means. Game time control means (a function of executing a change start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and a function of executing a change display control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) so as to perform the pattern display means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means, in each game time, a variable display time determining means (in the MPU 252 of the display controller 212, (A function of executing a variation start process), and when a variation display of the pattern of each game is performed, a display mode corresponding to the variation display time determined by the variation display time determination means is displayed on the display screen. Things,
The information reflecting the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the obtained information storage unit is the target of the shift determination is information before the predetermined special information is the target of the transfer determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at the timing (a function of executing a confirmation process for a reservation notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
State setting means for setting a special notification state based on the result of the specification by the preceding specifying means being a predetermined result (a function of executing a setting process of a hold command in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
When the setting of the special notification state is performed, the display mode of the game times prior to the game times related to the special information specified by the previous specifying means is changed to When the special mode corresponding to the specific result of the specifying means is set and the special notification state is set in a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern while the variable display of the pattern is being performed. In addition, the special notification control means (corresponding to the suspension notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) which performs the special notification by setting the display mode related to the game time in which the pattern is displayed in the special mode to the special mode. Function to execute the stopped result setting process and the function to execute the process during fluctuation),
When the special notification state is set in a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed, the special display state is determined by the variable display time determination unit in the game time. Special notification limiting means (a function of executing a reach-response process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for limiting execution of the special notification by the special notification control means or the execution mode according to the variable display time;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature B15, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit and not subject to the transition determination is performed at a timing before the special information is subject to the transition determination. May be executed. Accordingly, for the player, not only the game for generating the ball entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry unit and the game for confirming the transition determination result of the special information acquired based on the ball entry, a plurality of special If the information is stored in the acquired information storage means, for the special information whose order of transition is determined later, the result when the target of transition determination is confirmed or predicted according to the content of the special notification. A game to play is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In addition, the player recognizes the shift determination result of each game round by visually recognizing the display mode of the pattern on the pattern display means. The display mode of the picture is determined according to the variable display time determined by the variable display time determining means. Then, the display mode of the game times related to the special information targeted for the transition determination before the predetermined special information is targeted for the transition determination becomes a special mode corresponding to the content of the predetermined special information, Special announcements are made. Thereby, if the player is paying attention to the display screen of the picture display means in order to grasp the transition determination result of each game round, the special notification can be naturally confirmed, and despite the special notification being performed, It is suppressed that it is overlooked.

  Furthermore, when a new ball is entered into the starting ball entry section during a predetermined period during the variable display in a situation where the pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the special information acquired based on the ball entry. In some cases, a special notification state is set, and a special notification corresponding to the special notification state is performed in a game round in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner. As a result, when the special notification is performed, it is possible to advance the time from the occurrence of the ball entry to the starting ball entry section to the time when the special notification is performed, and the special notification is provided to the player. The opportunity to confirm is increased.

  In such a configuration, when the special notification state is set during a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern while the variable display of the pattern is being performed, the variable display determined by the variable display time determination unit is performed. Depending on the time, the execution of the special notification or its execution mode is restricted. Here, when the variable display time determined by the variable display time determining means is different from the variable display time corresponding to the special mode, for example, if the variable display time is changed to display the special mode, a special configuration is adopted. Since the fluctuating display time fluctuates with the execution of the notification, there is a possibility that a difference occurs in the digestibility of the number of games per unit time depending on the game hall. On the other hand, for example, in a configuration in which the special mode is displayed without changing the variable display time under the situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed, the display mode becomes unnatural, and the player may feel uncomfortable. . On the other hand, when it is necessary to change the variable display time determined by the variable display time determination means as described above, the execution of the special notification or the execution form thereof is limited, and the above-described inconvenience is caused. It is possible to increase the interest of the game while suppressing occurrence.

  As described above, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above features can be applied will be described below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine comprising: a plurality of game components arranged in a region; and a bonus granted to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of the game components.

  10 Pachinko machine, 33 Upper working port, 34 Lower working port, 41 Symbol display device, 53 Game ball launching mechanism, 81 Main control device, 202 MPU, 203 ROM, 204 RAM, 212 ... Display control device, 221: hit / fail table storage area, 223: variable display time table storage area, 252: MPU, 253: program ROM, 254: work RAM, 255: VDP, 312: medium symbol row stop result table storage area, 315 ... stop line change table storage area, 318 ... reservation notice reach symbol determination table storage area, 320 ... correction table storage area, RE ... reservation area, Z1 to Z3 ... design row.

Claims (1)

A picture display means for variably displaying the picture on the display screen,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a specified number predetermined as a plurality of numbers as an upper limit,
When a determination is made as to whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined addition information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the obtained information storage means A determination unit for sequentially performing the determination on the plurality of special information,
A bonus granting unit that grants a bonus to the player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determining unit being a granting response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information,
Prior to the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means or based on the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means, a variation display of the design is started in the design display means, Displaying a stop result corresponding to the determination result and terminating the variation display of the pattern as one of the game times, and changing the pattern of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means. Game times control means for controlling the picture display means so that display is performed,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means determines, in each game time, mode information corresponding to the display mode of the pattern on the display screen when the display of the pattern is changed based on the result of the determination of the assignment. In the case where the variation display of the pattern of each game is performed, the variation display of the pattern of each game is performed in a display mode according to the mode information determined by the mode information determination unit.
The information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the assignment determination, and the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the assignment determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at the timing;
State setting means for setting a special notification state based on that the specified result by the preceding specifying means was a predetermined specified result,
In the situation where the special notification state is set, and when the setting is performed, in a situation where a game time prior to the game time related to the special information which has been specified by the destination specifying means is performed. In a situation where the special display corresponding to the specification result of the destination specifying means for the special information that has been specified is executed by the pattern display means, and the variable display of the pattern is performed. When the setting of the special notification state is performed in a predetermined period during the change display of the pattern, a special notification control unit configured to cause the stop result of the game round to be a special mode corresponding to the special notification,
When the special notification state is set in a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed, the special information state is determined by the mode information determining means in the game round. If the variable display time corresponding to the mode information is a variable display time that needs to be changed in order to set the stop result to the special mode, a special notification that prevents the stop result of the game round from being the special mode. Limiting means;
With
The picture display means has a first variable display area, a second variable display area, and a third variable display area as a plurality of variable display areas,
The game-time control means aligns an assigned symbol corresponding to the assigned correspondence result among a plurality of symbols on one predetermined active line formed by the plurality of variable display areas on the display screen. It is configured to notify that the special information that has triggered the game round is the special information corresponding to the granting result by performing stop display.
The special notification control means, when the setting of the special notification state is performed in response to the special information that is the giving correspondence result, the added picture corresponding to the giving correspondence result, in the plurality of variable display areas It is a configuration to execute the special notification as the special mode to stop display in all the variable display area, and to prevent the stop display in line with the applied pattern on the activated line,
In each of the game times, based on a result of the giving determination, a variable display time determining unit that determines a variable display time when the variable display of the pattern is performed, the mode information determining unit includes the variable display time determining unit. Is to determine the aspect information corresponding to the determined variable display time,
In the aspect information determined by the aspect information determining means, a stop display is provided in the first variable display area and the second variable display area of the plurality of variable display areas as a stage before the variable display is finally stopped. Reach variation display in which a reach line is formed with the same pattern to be displayed and a pattern is variably displayed in the third variation display area of the plurality of variation display areas in a state where the reach line is formed. Aspects are included,
At least in the game time in which the specific reach fluctuation display mode is performed, the pattern stopped and displayed in the third fluctuation display area is uniquely determined according to the fluctuation display time determined by the fluctuation display time determination means. Has been
The special notification control means is configured to set the first fluctuation display area and the second fluctuation in a game time in which the specific reach fluctuation display mode is performed in a situation where the special notification state is set by the state setting means. Performing a reach pattern setting process to set the reach pattern forming the reach line by stopping and displaying in the display area as the granting pattern corresponding to the special information which has triggered the special notification, and the third variable display By leaving the pattern stopped and displayed in the area as the pattern corresponding to the variable display time, in the game mode in which the specific reach variation display mode is performed in the situation where the special notification state is set, There is a case where the special notification is executed and a case where the special notification is not executed,
The special notification restricting unit is configured to set the special notification state in a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern in a state where the variable display of the pattern is performed in a mode in which the reach variable display mode is not executed. If performed, if the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means in the game round is the variable display time that needs to be changed to make the stop result the special mode, The special notification state is set in a state in which the fluctuation display of the pattern is performed in a mode in which the reach fluctuation display mode is executed while the stop result of the game round is not set to the special mode. When the special notification state is set, the reach pattern setting process is not executed and the stop display is performed in the third variable display area regardless of the period when the special notification state is set. By changing the pattern corresponding to the variable display time to a pattern corresponding to the variable display time, in a case where the variable display time needs to be changed in the game time, the stop result of the game time does not become the special mode. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

Images